LG 55LX9500 SAC34134205_1 User Manual Owner's Sac34134205 2 Eng

2010-08-14

User Manual: LG 55LX9500 Owner's Manual Most comprehensive of product setup and usage. (English)

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 218

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

OWNER’S MANUAL

LED LCD TV / PLASMA TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.

The model and serial number of the TV is located
on the back and one side of the TV.
Record it below should you ever need service.

LED LCD TV MODELS
47LX9500
55LX9500
47LEX8
55LEX8
60LEX9
72LEX9

PLASMA TV MODELS
50PK950
60PK950

MODEL
SERIAL

P/NO : SAC34134205 (1004-REV02)

www.lg.com

WARNING / CAUTION
WARNING / CAUTION
To prevent fire or shock hazards, do not expose
this product to rain or moisture.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.

WARNING/CAUTION
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

NOTE TO CABLE/TV INSTALLER
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the National
Electric Code (U.S.A.). The code provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the
grounding system of the building, as close to the
point of the cable entry as practical.

FCC Notice
Class B digital device
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause (harmful)
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation (of the
device).
Any changes or modifications in construction of
this device which are not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to modify this product in any
way without written authorization from LG
Electronics.
Unauthorized modification could void the user’s
authority to operate this product.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.

Protect the power cord from being walked
on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where
they exit from the apparatus.

Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus. When a cart is
used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.

Unplug this apparatus during lighting
storms or when unused for long periods
of time.

Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.

Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.

Do not use this apparatus near water.

Clean only with dry cloth.

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong, The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Never touch this apparatus or antenna during
a thunder or lighting storm.

When mounting a TV on the wall, make sure
not to install the TV by the hanging power
and signal cables on the back of the TV.

Do not allow an impact shock or any objects
to fall into the product, and do not drop onto
the screen with something.

CAUTION concerning the Power Cord:
It is recommend that appliances be placed
upon a dedicated circuit; that is, a single
outlet circuit which powers only that appliance and has no additional outlets or
branch circuits. Check the specification page
of this owner's manual to be certain.
Do not connect too many appliances to the
same AC power outlet as this could result in
fire or electric shock.
Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded wall
outlets, loose or damaged wall outlets, extension cords, frayed power cords, or damaged
or cracked wire insulation are dangerous . Any
of these conditions could result in electric
shock or fire. Periodically examine the cord of
your appliance, and if its appearance indicates
damage or deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord
replaced with an exact replacement part by
an authorized servicer. Protect the power cord
from physical or mechanical abuse, such as
being twisted, kinked, pinched, closed in a
door, or walked upon. Pay particular attention
to plugs, wall outlets, and the point where the
cord exits the appliance.
Do not use a damaged or loose power cord.
Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the
TV. Grasp the plug when unplugging the
power cord.

WARNING - To reduce the risk of fire or electrical shock, do not expose this product to
rain, moisture or other liquids. Do not touch
the TV with wet hands. Do not install this
product near flammable objects such as
gasoline or candles or expose the TV to
direct air conditioning.

Do not expose to dripping or splashing and
do not place objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, cups, etc. on or over the apparatus (e.g. on shelves above the unit).

GROUNDING
Ensure that you connect the earth ground
wire to prevent possible electric shock (i.e. a
TV with a three-prong grounded AC plug
must be connected to a three-prong grounded AC outlet). If grounding methods are not
possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
Do not try to ground the unit by connecting it
to telephone wires, lightening rods, or gas
pipes.
Power
Supply
Short-circuit
Breaker

DISCONNECTING DEVICE FROM MAINS
Mains plug is the disconnecting device. The
plug must remain readily operable.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC
wall outlet, it is not disconnected from AC
power even if you turn off the power switch
on the unit.

ANTENNAS
Outdoor antenna grounding
If an outdoor antenna is installed, follow the
precautions below. An outdoor antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of
overhead power lines or other electric light or
power circuits, or where it can come in contact
with such power lines or circuits as death or
serious injury can occur.
Be sure the antenna system is grounded so as
to provide some protection against voltage
surges and built-up static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electrical Code
(NEC) in the U.S.A. provides information with
respect to proper grounding of the mast and
supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of
grounding conductors, location of antenna
discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes and requirements for the grounding
electrode.

Ventilation
Install your TV where there is proper ventilation. Do not install in a confined space such
as a bookcase. Do not cover the product
with cloth or other materials (e.g.) plastic
while plugged in. Do not install in excessively dusty places.

Take care not to touch the ventilation openings. When watching the TV for a long
period, the ventilation openings may
become hot.

If you smell smoke or other odors coming
from the TV or hear strange sounds, unplug
the power cord contact an authorized service
center.

Do not press strongly upon the panel with
hand or sharp object such as nail, pencil or
pen, or make a scratch on it.

Keep the product away from direct sunlight.

For LED LCD TV
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be
a small “flicker” when it is turned on. This is
normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
Some minute dot defects may be visible on
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or
blue spots. However, they have no adverse
effect on the monitor's performance.
Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding
your finger(s) against it for long periods of
time. Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen.

Antenna grounding according to the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70
Ground Clamp

Antenna Lead in Wire

Antenna Discharge Unit
(NEC Section 810-20)

Electric Service
Equipment

Grounding Conductor
(NEC Section 810-21)
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding
Electrode System (NEC
Art 250, Part H)

NEC: National Electrical Code

Cleaning
When cleaning, unplug the power cord and
rub gently with a soft cloth to prevent
scratching. Do not spray water or other liquids
directly on the TV as electric shock may occur.
Do not clean with chemicals such as alcohol,
thinners or benzene.

Moving
Make sure the product is turned off, unplugged
and all cables have been removed. It may take
2 or more people to carry larger TVs. Do not
press against or put stress on the front panel
of the TV.

CONTENTS
WARNING / CAUTION............................2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS........................3
CONTENTS.......................................................6
FEATURE OF THIS TV.............................. 8
PREPARATION
Accessories............................................................10
Optional Extras...................................................... 11
Front Panel Information..................................... 12
Back Panel Information......................................15
Stand Instructions.......................................................18
VESA Wall Mounting.........................................22
Cable Management...........................................24
Desktop Pedestal Installation..........................26
Swivel Stand.........................................................26
Kensington Security System...........................26
Securing the TV to the wall to prevent falling
when the tv is used on a stand...................... 27
Antenna or Cable Connection........................28

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
HD Receiver Setup.............................................29
DVD SETUP..........................................................33
VCR SETUP..........................................................36
Other A/V Source Setup..................................38
USB Connection.................................................38
Headphone Setup.....................................................39
Audio Out Connection......................................40
External Equipment WIreless Connection
(Optional Extras)................................................... 41
PC Setup...............................................................42
Network Setup..................................................... 47

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Remote Control Functions...............................55
Magic Motion Remote Control Functions...58
Turning on the TV................................................ 61
Channel Selection............................................... 61
Volume Adjustment............................................ 61
Initial Setting........................................................62

On-Screen Menus Selection...........................64
Quick Menu..........................................................66
Home Menu......................................................... 67
Customer Support
- Software Update..............................................68
- Picture Test/Sound Test................................. 69
- Product/Service Info....................................... 70
- Network Test....................................................... 71
Simple Manual..................................................... 72
Channel Setup
- Auto Scan (Auto Tuning)............................... 73
- Add/Delete Channel (Manual Tuning)...... 74
- Channel Editing................................................ 75
Channel List......................................................... 76
Favorite Channel Setup..................................... 77
Channel Information.......................................... 78
Channel Brief Information................................ 79
Input List.............................................................. 80
Input Label............................................................. 81
Reset to Factory Default (Initial Setting)......82
Mode Setting.......................................................83
Demo Mode.........................................................84
AV Mode................................................................85
Game/Schedule..................................................86
SIMPLINK..............................................................90

3D VIDEO
3D Video................................................................92
Watching 3D Video............................................94

MY MEDIA
Entry Mode...........................................................96
Connection Method........................................... 97
Movie list.............................................................. 102
Photo list.............................................................. 109
Music list............................................................... 115
DivX Registration Code................................... 120
Deactivation......................................................... 121

NETWORK
Legal Notice....................................................... 122

NETCAST
Netcast Menu..................................................... 123
YOUTUBE............................................................ 124
PICASA................................................................ 126

PICTURE CONTROL
Picture Size (Aspect Ratio) Control............. 128
Picture Wizard.................................................... 130
ꕊ Energy Saving............................................. 132
Preset Picture Settings (Picture Mode)...... 133
Manual Picture Adjustment - User Mode.134
Picture Improvement Technology (Advanced
Control)................................................................ 135
Expert Picture control...................................... 136
Picture Reset...................................................... 139
TruMotion ......................................................... 140
LED Local Dimming .........................................141
Power Indicator ................................................ 142
Image Sticking Minimization (ISM) Method . 143

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Auto Volume....................................................... 144
Clear Voice II...................................................... 145
Balance................................................................ 146
Preset Sound Settings (Sound Mode)........147
Sound Setting Adjustment - User Mode.. 148
Audio Reset........................................................ 149
TV Speakers On/Off Setup........................... 150
Stereo/SAP Broadcast Setup........................ 151
Audio Language .............................................. 152
On-screen Menus Language Selection..... 153
Caption Mode
- Analog Broadcasting System Captions.. 154
- Digital Broadcasting System Captions.... 155
- Caption Option............................................... 156

TIME SETTING
Clock Setting
- Auto Clock Setup...........................................157
- Manual Clock Setup..................................... 158
Auto On/Off Time Setting............................. 159
Sleep Timer Setting......................................... 160

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password & Lock System
- Setting up Your Password.............................161
- Set Password.................................................. 162
Lock System....................................................... 163
Channel Blocking.............................................. 164
Movie & TV Rating........................................... 165
Downloadable Rating........................................170
External Input Blocking.....................................171
Key Lock...............................................................172

APPENDIX
Troubleshooting..................................................173
Maintenance........................................................176
Product Specifications.....................................177
IR Codes..............................................................180
External Control Through RS-232C........... 182
Open Source License...................................... 188

FEATURE OF THIS TV
ꔛ

Some of these features are not available on all models.
High-definition television. Highresolution digital television broadcast and playback system composed of roughly a million or more
pixels, 16:9 aspect-ratio screens,
and AC3 digital audio. A subset of
digital television, HDTV formats
include 1080p, 1080i, and 720p
resolutions.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby “and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and HighDefinition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC."
Displays HDTV programs in full
1920 x 1080p resolution for a more
detailed picture.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a
digital video format created by
DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX
Certified device that plays DivX
video. Visit www.divx.com for more
information and software tools to
convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ONDEMAND: This DivX Certified®
device must be registered in order
to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the
registration code, locate the DivX
VOD section in the device setup
menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this
code to complete the registration
process and learn more about
DivX VOD.
“DivX Certified to play DivX video
up to HD 1080p, including premium content”
“Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688;7,519,274”

This TV contains the detailed calibrations necessary for professional
certification by the Imaging Science
Foundation. The resulting ISF “day”
and “night” modes will then be
accessible by the user to experience the best their LG HDTV has to
offer.
Sophisticated and detailed calibrations can be made through the
ISFccc mode.
Detailed calibration requires a
licensed technician.
Please contact your local dealer to
inquire about an ISF certified technician.
THX
(Thomlinson
Holman’s
Experiment) is an audio and video
certification standard established
by George Lucas and Thomlinson.
A THX certified display guarantees
screen quality that exceeds the display standard specification in both
hardware and software.
A unique invisible speaker system
tuned by renowned audio expert,
Mr. Mark Levinson. Speakers are
embedded in strategic spots
behind the front cabinet and use
minute vibrations to turn the entire
front bezel into the speaker system.
The result s a clean, polished look,
and enhanced audio by increasing
the “sweet spot”, giving a wider and
richer sound field.

Unlike other sensors which can only
sense brightness of ambient light,
LG’s “Intelligent Sensor” uses
4,096 sensing steps to evaluate its
surroundings. Using a sophisticated algorithm, the LG processes
picture quality elements including
brightness, contrast, color, sharpness and white balance. The result
is a picture optimized for it’s surroundings, more pleasing to watch
and which can also save up to 50%
in power consumption.

AV Mode is three preset picture
and audio settings. It allows the
viewer to quickly switch between
common settings. It includes
Cinema, Sports, and Game Modes.

View videos and photos and listen
to music on your TV through USB
2.0 (‘videos’ dependent on model).

Automatically enhances and amplifies the sound of human voice frequency range to help keep dialogue audible when background
noise swells.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO PREVENT “IMAGE
BURN / BURN-IN” ON YOUR TV SCREEN
ꔛ

ꔛ

When a fixed image (e.g. logos, screen menus, video game, and computer display) is displayed
on the TV for an extended period, it can become permanently imprinted on the screen. This
phenomenon is known as “image burn” or “burn-in.” Image burn is not covered under the manufacturer’s warranty.
In order to prevent image burn, avoid displaying a fixed image on your TV screen for a prolonged
period (2 or more hours for LCD, 1 or more
hours for Plasma).
Image burn can also occur on the letterboxed areas of your TV if you use the 4:3
aspect ratio setting for an extended period.

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
ACCESSORIES
PREPARATION

Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
The accessories included may differ from the images below.

1.5V 1.5V

1,5Vcc 1,5Vcc

1.5V 1.5V

Owner’s Manual

CD Manual,
Nero MediaHome 4
Essentials CD

Not included with all models

Remote Control,
Batteries (AAA)

Polishing Cloth

1.5V 1.5V

Motion Remote Control,
Strap,
Batteries
(AA)
1.5V 1.5V

Option Extras

* Wipe spots on the exterior only with the
polishing cloth.
* Do not wipe roughly when removing
stains. Excessive pressure may cause
scratches or discoloration.

1,5Vcc 1,5Vcc

D-sub 15 pin Cable

When using the VGA (D-sub 15
pin cable) PC connection, the user
must use shielded signal interface
cables with ferrite cores to maintain standards compliance.

Not included with all models

Ferrite Core
(Black)

Ferrite Core
(White)

Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic
waves that may interfere with the TV. Install the Ferrite
core on the power cable close to the wall plug.

Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic
wave when connecting the LAN cable. Place the ferrite
core far from TV and wind the LAN cable in the ferrite
core once.

Close to the wall plug.

1,5Vcc 1,5Vcc

(M4 x 12)

(M4 x 22)

x2
Cable Holder
(Refer to p.25)

Screws for stand assembly
(Refer to P.20)

PREPARATION

47/55LX9500, 47/55LEX8, 60/72LEX9

Component gender cable,
AV gender cable

Stand Rear Cover

Plasma TV
(For 50PK950)
1.5V 1.5V

1,5Vcc
x4

(M4 x 14) (M4 x 28)
Screws for stand assembly
(Refer to P.18)

1,5Vcc

Cable Holder
(Refer to P.24)

Power Cord

Cable
Protection Cover
Management Clip
(Refer to P.19)
(Refer to P.24)

Wireless LAN for
Broadband/DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)

OPTIONAL EXTRAS
Optional extras can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification.
Contact your dealer for buying these items.
These devices only work with compatible LG LED LCD TV and Plasma TV.
(For 47/55LX9500)

Wireless Media Box
(AN-WL100W)

Wireless LAN for Broadband/
DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)

3D Glasses
(AG-S100)

PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL INFORMATION
PREPARATION

ꔛ

Image shown may differ from your TV.

50/60PK950

Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the
surrounding conditions

Remote Control Sensor

SPEAKER
INPUT

INPUT

VOL

ENTER

VOL

ENTER

Touch Button
You can operate the button just by touching the button lightly with your finger.
INPUT

ENTER

POWER INPUT MENU ENTER
Button Button Button Button

Power/Standby Indicator
Illuminates red in standby mode.
The lighting is off while the TV remains on.

VOL

VOLUME
(+, -)
Buttons

CHANNEL
(ꕌ,ꕍ)
Buttons

PREPARATION

47/55LX9500

SPEAKER
Emitter
It is the part equipped with
the emitter exchanging signal with 3D glasses.
Please be careful not to
block the screen with objects
or people while watching a
3D Video.

CHANNEL (ꕍ,ꕌ)
Buttons

VOL

VOLUME (-, +)
Buttons

ENTER

ENTER Button

MENU Button

INPUT

INPUT Button
POWER Button

Remote Control Sensor

Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator
in the OPTION menu.►p.142)

PREPARATION
PREPARATION

ꔛ

Image shown may differ from your TV.

47/55LEX8, 60/72LEX9

Remote Control Sensor

Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in
the OPTION menu.►p.142)

SPEAKER
Emitter
CH

VOL

ENTER

INPUT

Touch Button
You can operate the button just by touching the button lightly with your finger.
CH

VOL

ENTER

CHANNEL VOLUME
(-, +)
(ꕍ,ꕌ)
Buttons
Buttons

ENTER

INPUT

ENTER MENU INPUT POWER
Button Button Button Button

USB IN 2
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL & SERVICE)

DVI IN 4

AV IN 2

/DVI IN

2
1
/DVI IN

REMOTE CONTROL IN

(SERVICE ONLY)

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

ANTENNA
/CABLE
IN

R
1

AUDIO

VIDEO

2
Y

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

AV IN 2

ANTENNA
/CABLE
IN

OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
(CONTROL & SERVICE)

LAN

AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)

WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

3
2
1

REMOTE CONTROL IN

/DVI IN

AV IN 1

COMPONENT IN

REMOTE CONTROL IN

RS-232C IN

COMPONENT IN

LAN

2
R

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

OPTICAL
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
(CONTROL & SERVICE)

AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)

WIRELESS
CONTROL

AV IN 1

COMPONENT IN

LAN

DVI IN 4

OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
(CONTROL & SERVICE)

AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)

WIRELESS
CONTROL

SERVICE ONLY

USB IN 2

USB IN 1

DVI IN 4

50/60PK950

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

USB IN 1

Image shown may differ from your TV.

PREPARATION

ꔛ

USB IN 2

BACK PANEL INFORMATION

2
Y

R
1

VIDEO

ANTENNA
/CABLE
IN

AUDIO

PREPARATION

12
USB IN 2

PREPARATION

47/55LX9500, 47/55LEX8, 60/72LEX9

LAN

RS-232C IN

RGB IN (PC)

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

5
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

2
AUDIO IN

ꔡ

WIRELESS
CONTROL

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

RGB IN (PC)

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

ANTENNA/
CABLE IN

LAN

AUDIO IN

ꔡ

WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
VIDEO

AUDIO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

ANTENNA/
CABLE IN

For HDMI IN 4 and USB IN 1, 2
► For an optimal connection,
HDMI cables and USB
devices should have bezels
less than 10 mm (0.39
inches) thick.

LAN

ꔡ

CAUTION

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

(SERVICE ONLY)

RS-232C IN

/DVI IN

ꔡ
WIRELESS
CONTROL

AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO

COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR

H/P

IN 4

USB IN 1

10 mm (0.39 inches)

WIRELESS
CONTROL

LAN
Network connection for Netflix, Yahoo! TV
Widgets, etc (for USA).
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
HDMI/DVI IN, HDMI IN
Digital Connection.
Supports HD video and Digital audio. Doesn’t
support 480i.
Accepts DVI video using an adapter or HDMI
to DVI cable (not included).
RGB IN (PC)
Analog PC Connection. Uses a D-sub 15 pin
cable (VGA cable).
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
0.32 cm (1/8 inch) headphone jack for analog
PC audio input.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) or
SERVICE ONLY
Used by third party devices.
This port is used for service or Hotel mode.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Digital optical audio output for use with amps
and home theater systems.
Note: In standby mode, this port doesn’t work.

AV (Audio/Video) IN
Analog composite connection.
Supports standard definition video only (480i).

ANTENNA/CABLE IN

Connect over-the-air or cable signals to this
jack.
8

COMPONENT IN
Analog Connection.
Supports HD.
Uses a red, green, and blue cable for video &
red and white for audio.

WIRELESS CONTROL
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the TV
to control the external input devices connected to Media Box wirelessly.

USB INPUT
Used for viewing photos, watching movies
and listening to MP3s.

HEADPHONE
0.32 cm (1/8 inch) headphone jack
Impedance 16 Ω , Maximum audio out 15 mW

Power Cord or Socket
For operation with AC power.
Caution: Never attempt to operate the TV on
DC power.

REMOTE CONTROL IN
For a wired remote control.

PREPARATION

PREPARATION
STAND INSTRUCTIONS (For 50/60PK950)
PREPARATION

ꔛ

Image shown may differ from your TV.

INSTALLATION (For 50PK950)
1

Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.

Assemble the parts of the STAND BODY
with the STAND BASE of the TV.

STAND BODY
M4 x 14

Assemble the parts of the CABLE
MANAGEMENT CLIP with the STAND
BODY.

Assemble the TV as shown.

Install the 4 screws into the holes shown.

! NOTE

► When assembling the desk type stand,
make sure the screws are fully tightened (If
? not tightened fully, the TV can tilt forward
after the product installation). Do not over
tighten.

CABLE
MANAGEMENT
CLIP

M4 x 28

STAND BASE

STAND BODY

PREPARATION

DETACHMENT

Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.

50PK950

Remove the screws that
hold the stand on.
M4 x 28

60PK950

M4 x 30

Detach the stand from TV.

PROTECTION COVER
After removing the stand, install the included
PROTECTION COVER over the hole for the
stand.
Press the PROTECTION COVER into the TV until
you hear it click.
When installing the wall mounting bracket, use
the PROTECTION COVER.

PROTECTION COVER
Fix a guide to the outside.

PREPARATION
STAND INSTRUCTIONS (For 47/55LX9500, 47/55LEX8)
PREPARATION

ꔛ

Image shown may differ from your TV.

INSTALLATION
1

Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.

Assemble the parts of the STAND
BODY with the STAND BASE of the
TV.
At this time, tighten the screws that
hold the STAND BODY on.

STAND BODY
M4 x 22

STAND BASE

Install the 4 screws into the holes shown.
M4 x 12

Assemble the part of the STAND
REAR COVER with the TV.

! NOTE

► When assembling the desk type stand,
make sure the screws are fully tightened (If
? not tightened fully, the TV can tilt forward
after the product installation). Do not over
tighten.

STAND REAR
COVER

Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.

Detach the STAND REAR COVER from TV.

Remove the screws that hold the stand on.

Detach the stand from TV.

PREPARATION

DETACHMENT

PREPARATION
VESA WALL MOUNTING
PREPARATION

Install your wall mount onto wooden studs perpendicular to the floor. When attaching to other building
materials, please contact a professional.
If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury.
We recommend that you use an LG brand wall mount when mounting the TV to a wall.
LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer.
VESA (A * B)
Model

Standard
Screw

Quantity

Wall Mounting Bracket
(sold separately)
LSW200B, LSW200BG,
LSW200BX, LSW200BXG

47LX9500,
47LEX8

200 * 200

LSW400B, LSW400BG
55LX9500,
55LEX8

400 * 400

AW-50PG60M AW-50PG60MS
50PK950

400 * 400

AW-60PG60M AW-60PG60MS
60PK950

600 * 400

PREPARATION

! NOTE
► Screw length needed depends on the wall
mount used. For further information, refer to
? the instructions included with the mount.
► Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are
shown in the table.
► When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed
installation manual and all parts necessary for
assembly are provided.
► Do not use screws longer than the standard
dimension, as they may cause damage to the
inside to the TV.
► For wall mounts that do not comply with the
VESA standard screw specifications, the length
! of the screws may differ depending on their
specifications.

► Do not use screws that do not comply with the
VESA standard screw specifications.
Do not use fasten the screws too strongly, this
may damage the TV or cause the TV to a fall,
leading to personal injury. LG is not liable for
these kinds of accidents.
► LG is not liable for TV damage or personal
injury when a non-VESA or non specified wall
mount is used or the consumer fails to follow
the TV installation instructions.

CAUTION
► Do not install your wall mount kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to
electric shock.

PREPARATION
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PREPARATION

ꔛ

Image shown may differ from your TV.

Plasma TV

How to use the CABLE HOLDER

After connecting the cables as necessary, install the CABLE HOLDER as shown and bundle the
cables.
In case of the LAN cable, install as shown to reduce the electromagnetic wave.

CABLE HOLDER

How to use the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP

Connect the cables as necessary.
To connect additional equipment, see the
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP section.

Install the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP
into the TV until clicking sound.

H
OW TO REMOVE THE CABLE
MANAGEMENT CLIP
► Hold the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP with
both hands and pull it backward as shown.

Image shown may differ from your TV.

PREPARATION

ꔛ

47/55LX9500, 47/55LEX8, 60/72LEX9

Secure the power cord with the CABLE
HOLDER on the TV back cover.
It will help prevent the power cable from
being removed by accident.

CABLE HOLDER

After connecting the cables as necessary,
install the CABLE HOLDER as shown
and bundle the cables.

CABLE HOLDER

PREPARATION
DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION
PREPARATION

ꔛ

Image shown may differ from your TV.

For proper ventilation, allow a clearance of 10.1 cm (4 inch) on all four sides from the wall.

10.1 cm (4 inch)
10.1 cm (4 inch)

10.1 cm (4 inch)

CAUTION
► Ensure adequate ventilation by following the clearance recommendations.
► Do not mount near or above any type of heat source.

SWIVEL STAND
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set manually to the left or right direction by 20 º to suit
your viewing position.

KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM
ꔛ

This feature is not available for all models.

-T
he TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel. Connect the Kensington Security
System cable as shown below.
- For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security
System, refer to the user’s guide provided with the Kensington
Security System.
For further information, contact http://www.kensington.com,
the internet homepage of the Kensington company. Kensington
sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such
as notebook PCs and LCD projectors.
NOTE: The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory.

ꔛ

You should purchase necessary components to prevent the TV from tipping over (when not using a
wall mount).
Image shown may differ from your TV.
We recommend that you set up the TV close to a wall so it cannot fall over if pushed backwards.
Additionally, we recommend that the TV be attached to a wall so it cannot be pulled in a forward
direction, potentially causing injury or damaging the product.
Caution: Please make sure that children don’t climb on or hang from the TV.

ꔛ

Insert the eye-bolts (or TV brackets and bolts) to tighten the product to the wall as shown in the
picture.
* If your product has the bolts in the eye-bolts position before inserting the eye-bolts, loosen the
bolts.
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts (sold separately) to the wall. Match the height of the bracket
that is mounted on the wall to the holes in the product.
Ensure the eye-bolts or brackets are tightened securely.
ꔛ

PREPARATION

SECURING THE TV TO THE WALL TO PREVENT FALLING
WHEN THE TV IS USED ON A STAND

Use a sturdy rope (sold separately) to tie the product. It is safer to tie the
rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product.

! NOTE
► Use a platform or cabinet strong enough and large enough to support the size and weight of
the TV.
►
? To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and the one on the TV are
the same.

USB IN
IN 4
CABLE MANAGEMENT

ANTENNA OR CABLE CONNECTION

AV IN 2

USB IN 1

PREPARATION

ꔛ

1. Antenna (Analog or Digital)
RS-232C IN

LAN

Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments
ꔡ
(Connect to wall antenna
socket)
WIRELESS

RGB/DVI OPTICAL DIGITAL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT

AC IN

/DVI IN
Y

CONTROL

CABLE MANAGEMENT

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

IN 4

(SERVICE ONLY)
IN (PC)
Wall Antenna Socket or Outdoor Antenna without a Cable RGB
Box
Connections.
For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction if3 needed.

Wall
Antenna
Socket

L/MONO AUDIO R

AC IN

USB INVIDEO
2

To prevent damage do not connect to the power outlet until all connections are made between the
devices.
Image shown may differ from your TV.

ANTENNA/
CABLE IN

VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R H/P

ꔛ

H/P

PREPARATION

AV IN 2

Outdoor
Antenna
(VHF, UHF)

RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
Single-family Dwellings /Houses
(Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)

2. Cable

WIRELESS
CONTROL

(SERVICE ONLY)

RGB/DVI OPTICAL DIGITAL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT

/DVI IN
Y

1
VIDEO

AUDIO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

RS-232C IN

Be careful not to bend the copper wire
when connecting the antenna.

LAN

ꔡ

Copper Wire
RGB IN (PC)

ANTENNA/
CABLE IN

Cable TV
Wall Jack
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)

ꔛ
ꔛ

If the antenna needs to be split for two TV’s, install a 2-Way Signal Splitter.
For much more information about antennas visit our Knowledgebase at http://lgknowledgebase.
com. Search for antenna.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
ꔛ

To prevent the equipment damage, never plug in any power cords until you have finished connecting all
equipment.

ꔛ

Image shown may differ from your TV.

HD RECEIVER SETUP
Component Connection
1. How to connect
Y

Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the
digital set-top box to the COMPONENT IN
VIDEO 1, 2, or 3* jacks on the TV. Match the
jack colors (Y = green, PB = blue, and PR = red).

Connect the audio output of the digital set-top
box to the COMPONENT IN AUDIO 1, 2, or 3*
jacks on the TV.

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN
3
(RGB/DVI)

OPTICAL
DIGITAL

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

2
1

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

WIRELESS
CONTROL

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

COMPONENT IN

ꔡ

Select the Component1, Component2, or
Component3 input source on the TV using the
INPUT button on the remote control.

* Component3: For LED LCD TV

AV IN 1

ꔛ

RGB IN (PC)
LAN

Turn on the digital set-top box.
(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital settop box operation.)

2. How to use
ꔛ

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

This TV can receive digital over-the-air/digital cable signals without an external digital set-top box.
However, if you do receive digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device.

Y, CB/PB, CR/PR
Resolution
LAN

ꔡ

WIRELESS
720x480p
CONTROL

1920x1080i

1920x1080p

Vertical
Frequency(Hz)

15.73

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

15.73
AUDIO IN

59.94

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

60.00

AUDIO OUT

31.47
2

59.94

31.50

1280x720p

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

44.96

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

720x480i

RGB IN (PC)
Horizontal
(KHz)
/DVI IN
Frequency

VIDEO

R
60.00

59.94

AUDIO

45.00

60.00

33.72

59.94

33.75

60.00

26.97

23.976

27.00

24.00

33.71

29.97

33.75

30.00

67.432

59.94

67.50

60.00

HDMI OUTPUT

RGB IN (PC)

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

3
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

ANT IN

ANT OUT

S-VIDEO VIDEO

OUTPUT
SWITCH

IN 4

COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR

USB IN 1

USB IN 2
R

AUDIO

R
L
PR

AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO

H/P

COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR

AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO

H/P

USB IN 1

USB IN 2

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

30
IN 4

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
For LED LCD TV

PB
Y

/DVI IN

LAN

OPTICAL
DIGITAL

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

COMPONENT IN

ꔡ

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

WIRELESS
CONTROL

AV IN 1

(RGB/DVI)

1
VIDEO

AUDIO

RGB IN (PC)

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

HDMI Connection
1
2

RS-232C IN

/DVI IN

LAN

Connect the digital set-top box to HDMI/DVI IN
1, 2, 3, or 4 jack on the TV.

3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

2
AUDIO IN

ꔡ

No separate audio connection is necessary.
HDMI supports both audio and video.

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

2. How to use
ꔛ

Turn on the digital set-top box.

ꔛ

(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital settop box.)
Select the HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, or HDMI4 input
source on the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.

! NOTE

► If an HDMI cable doesn’t support High Speed HDMI,
it can cause flickers or no screen display. In this case
? use the latest cables that support High Speed HDMI.
► HDMI Audio Supported Format: Dolby Digital (32 KHz, 44.1
KHz, 48 KHz), Linear PCM (32 KHz, 44.1 KHz, 48 KHz)

HDMI OUTPUT

RS-232C IN

RGB IN (PC)

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

2
AUDIO IN

ꔡ

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

HDMI-DTV
Resolution
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i

1920x1080p

VIDEO

Horizontal
Frequency(KHz)

Vertical
Frequency(Hz)

31.47

59.94

31.50

60.00

44.96

59.94

45.00

60.00

33.72

59.94

33.75

60.00

26.97

23.976

27.00

24.00

33.71

29.97

33.75

30.00

67.432

59.94

67.50

60.00

DVI OUTPUT

AUDIO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

EXTERNAL
EQUIPMENT SETUP
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

1. How to connect

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
HDMI OUTPUT

DVI to HDMI Connection
1
2

/DVI IN

LAN

3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

2
AUDIO IN

ꔡ

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

2
Y

Connect the digital set-top box audio output to
the AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.

VIDEO

Turn on the digital set-top box.

(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital settop box.)
Select the HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, or HDMI4* input

source on the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.

* HDMI4: For Plasma TV

! NOTE

► A DVI to HDMI cable or adapter is required for this connection. DVI doesn't support audio, so a separate audio
? connection is necessary.

2. How to use

ꔛ

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

ꔛ

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

DVI OUTPUT

AUDIO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

1. How to connect
Connect the DVI output of the digital set-top
box to the HDMI/DVI IN 1, 2, 3, or 4* jack on
the TV.

RS-232C IN

RGB IN (PC)

DVD SETUP
Component Connection
1

Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the
DVD to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO 1, 2, or 3*
jacks on the TV.
Match the jack colors (Y = green, PB = blue, and
PR = red).

Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the
COMPONENT IN AUDIO 1, 2, or 3* jacks on the
TV.

RGB IN (PC)

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

WIRELESS
CONTROL

1
VIDEO

AUDIO

RGB IN (PC)

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

B-Y

R-Y

USB IN 2
USB IN 1

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO IN

ꔡ

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

AUDIO

VIDEO

HDMI OUTPUT

RGB IN (PC)

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

AUDIO IN

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

2
Y

COMPONEN

ꔡ

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

AV IN 1

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

USB IN 2

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO

COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR

3
2

H/P

/DVI IN

LAN

IN 4

RS-232C IN

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

To get better picture quality, connect a DVD player
to the component input ports as shown below.

Video output ports
on DVD player

AUDIO IN

ꔡ

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

For LED LCD TV

Component Input ports

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

3
2

Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
Select the Component1, Component2, or
Component3 input source on the TV using the
INPUT button on the remote control.
Refer to the DVD player’s manual for operating
instructions.

Component ports on
the TV

2
RS-232C IN

/DVI IN

LAN

* Component3: For LED LCD TV

COMPONENT IN

ꔛ

AV IN 1

ꔛ

2. How to use
ꔛ

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

1. How to connect

AUDIO

USB IN 2

VIDEO

USB IN 1

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

ꔛ

ANT IN

S-VIDEO VIDEO

3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

2
AUDIO IN

ꔡ
L

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
R

AUDIO

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

VIDEO

Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD. ANT OUT OUTPUT
SWITCH
Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on the TV
using the INPUT button on the remote control.
Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating
instructions.

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

USB IN 2

IN 4

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO

H/P

COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR

USB IN 1

For LED LCD TV

COMPONENT IN

ꔛ

/DVI IN

LAN

Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
and DVD. Match the jack colors (Video = yellow,
Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red)

2. How to use

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)
IN 4

RGB IN (PC)

AV IN 1

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

1. How to connect

H/P

Composite (RCA) Connection

AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO

COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR

HDMI OUTPUT

RS-232C IN

RGB IN (PC)

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

COMPONENT IN

ꔡ

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

WIRELESS
CONTROL

AV IN 1

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

1
VIDEO

AUDIO

RGB IN (PC)

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

HDMI Connection
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

1. How to connect
1

Connect the HDMI output of the DVD to the
HDMI/DVI IN 1, 2, 3 or 4 jack on the TV.

/DVI IN

LAN

AUDIO IN

No separate audio connection is necessary.
HDMI supports both audio and video.

ꔡ

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

2. How to use
ꔛ

ꔛ

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

RS-232C IN

Select the HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, or HDMI4 input
source on the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.
Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating
instructions.

HDMI OUTPUT

! NOTE

RGB IN (PC)

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

2
AUDIO IN

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

2
Y

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

COMPONENT IN

ꔡ

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

AV IN 1

AUDIO

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
VCR SETUP
Antenna Connection

RS-232C IN
Connect the RF antenna
out socket
RGB IN (PC) (CONTROL&SERVICE)
/DVIANTENNA/CABLE
IN
of the VCR to the
LAN
3
IN socket
on the TV.
RGB/DVI OPTICAL DIGITAL

2. How to use
ꔛ

ꔛ

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

IN AUDIO OUT
Connect the antennaAUDIOcable
to the RF
1
ꔡ
2the VCR.
antenna
in
socket
of
WIRELESS

CONTROL

ANTENNA/
CABLE IN

AUDIO

VIDEO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

1. How to connect

RGB IN (PC)

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

AUDIO IN

2
Y

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

ANT IN

S-VIDEO

ANT OUT

OUTPUT
SWITCH

VIDEO

AUDIO

COMPONENT IN

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

AV IN 1

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

WIRELESS
CONTROL

ANT IN

OUTPUT
SWITCH

VIDEO

Wall Jack

Antenna

/DVI IN

ꔡ

S-VIDEO

Set VCR output switch to 3 or 4 and
then tune TV to the same channel number.
Insert a video tape into the VCR and
press PLAY on the VCR (Refer to the
VCR owner’s manual).

LAN

ANT OUT

AUDIO

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

1. How to connect

COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR

Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
and VCR. Match the jack colors (Video = yellow,
Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red)

AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO

IN 4

on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.)
Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on the TV
using the INPUT button on the remote control.

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

2
AUDIO IN

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
VIDEO

! NOTE
►If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable
from the VCR to the AUDIO L/MONO jack of the TV.

ANT IN

S-VIDEO

ANT OUT

OUTPUT
SWITCH

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO

COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR

USB IN 1

For LED LCD TV

USB IN 2

H/P

Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY

IN 4

ꔡ

/DVI IN

COMPONENT IN

ꔛ

LAN

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

AV IN 1

2. How to use
ꔛ

RGB IN (PC)

H/P

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

USB IN 1

USB IN 2

Composite (RCA) Connection

MPONENT IN

WIRELESS
CONTROL

ANT IN

ANT OUT

S-VIDEO VIDEO

AUDIO

OUTPUT
SWITCH

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
OTHER A/V SOURCE SETUP
Camcorder

1. How to connect

ꔛ

Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on
the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.
Operate the corresponding external
equipment.

USB IN 2

USB IN 1

VIDEO

IN 4

2. How to use

Video Game Set

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R H/P

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks
between TV and external equipment.
Match the jack colors.
(Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and
Audio Right = red)

AV IN 2

USB CONNECTION
onnect the USB device to the USB
C
IN 1 or 2 jack on the side of TV.

2. How to use
ꔛ

After connecting the USB IN jack, you

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R H/P

IN 4

use the USB function. (►p.97)

USB IN 1

USB IN 2

1. How to connect

AV IN 2

or
Memory Key

HEADPHONE SETUP (FOR LED LCD TV)
You can listen to the sound through headphones.

Plug headphones into the headphone socket.

To adjust the headphone volume,
press the VOL +/- button. If you
press the MUTE button, the sound
from the headphone is switched off.

! NOTE

H/P

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

1. How to connect

►AUDIO menu options are disabled when connecting
headphones.
►
W
? hen changing AV MODE with headphones connected, the change is applied to video but not to audio.
►Optical Digital Audio Out is not available with headphones connected.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
AUDIO OUT CONNECTION

1. How to connect
1

LAN

Connect one end of the optical cable to the
TV port of OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT.

2
3

Connect the other end of the optical cable to
the digital audio input on the audio equipment.
Set the “TV Speaker option - Off” in the
AUDIO menu. (►p.150). See the external audio
equipment instruction manual for operation.

!! NOTE
► When connecting with external audio equipment, such
as amplifiers or speakers, you can turn the TV speakers
? off in the menu. (►p.150)

?? ?

CAUTION
► Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at
the laser beam may damage your vision.
► Audio with ACP (Audio Copy Protection) function may
block digital audio output.

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

2
AUDIO IN

ꔡ

RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
VIDEO

AUDIO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

Send the TV’s audio to external audio equipment via the Audio Output port.
If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp).

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT WIRELESS CONNECTION
(OPTIONAL EXTRAS)

WIRELESS
CONTROL

OUT

RGB IN (PC)

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

LG TVs with a Wireless Control port support the LG Wireless Media Box, which is sold separately.
When you connect the wireless ready dongle (included with the media box) to the TV, external devices
can be connected to the LG Wireless Media Box and video and audio will be sent to the TV wirelessly.

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

AUDIO IN

ꔡ

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
VIDEO

AUDIO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

1. How to connect
1

onnect the WIRELESS CONTROL jack of the Wireless Ready Dongle to the WIRELESS
C
CONTROL jack on the TV.

Connect HDMI OUT jack of the Wireless Ready Dongle to the HDMI IN jack on the TV.

2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ

Select the desired input source on the TV using the INPUT button on the remote control.
Refer to the Wireless Media Box manual for operating instructions.

! NOTE
►When using the external device connected to the Wireless Media Box, some functions of the TV
menu may not work.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
PC SETUP

RS-232C IN

RGB IN (PC)

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

VGA (D-Sub 15 Pin) Connection
1. How to connect
1

Connect the VGA output of the PC to the
RGB IN (PC) jack on the TV.

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

WIRELESS
CONTROL

RS-232C IN

RGB IN (PC)
Y

/DVI IN

LAN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)
L R
PR

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

ꔡ

AUDIO

VIDEO

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

WIRELESS
CONTROL

AUDIO

VIDEO

Connect PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.

2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ

Turn on the PC and the TV.
Select the RGB-PC input source on the TV using
the INPUT button on the remote control.

RGB OUTPUT

AUDIO

1. How to connect
LAN

3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

/DVI IN

LAN

WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
VIDEO

* HDMI4: For Plasma TV

DVI OUTPUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)
L R
PR

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

ꔡ

RS-232C IN

RGB IN (PC)

AUDIO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

ꔛ

Turn on the PC and the TV.
Select the HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, or HDMI4* input
source on the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

ꔛ

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

Connect the DVI output of the PC to the HDMI/
DVI IN 1, 2, 3, or 4* jack on the TV.

2. How to use

RS-232C IN

RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN

ꔡ

AUDIO

DVI to HDMI Connection

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

ꔡ

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

LAN automatically
This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that a PC adjusts
to the TV's set3
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
tings.

! NOTE

►Depending on the graphics card, DOS mode may not work if a HDMI to DVI Cable is in use.

►In PC mode, there may be noise associated with the resolution, vertical pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is present, change the PC output to another resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and contrast on the PICTURE menu until the picture is clear.
►Avoid keeping a fixed image on the screen for a long period of time. The fixed image may become
permanently imprinted on the screen.
►The synchronization input form for Horizontal and Vertical frequencies is separate.
►Depending on the graphics card, some resolution settings may not allow the image to be positioned on the screen properly.
►If you experience overscan issues when using HDMI-PC 1920x1080, change aspect ratio to Just
scan.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

►To get the the best picture quality, adjust the PC graphics card to 1920x1080.

►When selecting HDMI-PC, set the “Input Label - PC” in the OPTION menu.

Supported Display Specifications (RGB-PC, HDMI-PC)
Resolution

Horizontal
Frequency (KHz)

Vertical
Frequency (Hz)

640x350

31.468

70.09

720x400

31.469

70.08

640x480

31.469

59.94

800x600

37.879

60.31

1024x768

48.363

60.00

1280x768

47.776

59.87

1360x768

47.712

60.015

1280x1024

63.981

60.02

1920x1080
RGB-PC

66.587

59.934

1920x1080
HDMI-PC

67.50

60.00

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Screen Setup for PC mode
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

Selecting Resolution
You can choose the resolution in RGB-PC mode.
The Position, Phase, and Size can also be adjusted.
You can choose this option only when the PC resolution is set to 1024X768, 1280X768 or 1360X768.
PICTURE

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

SCREEN
Resolution

• Color

• Tint

• Color Temp.

• Advanced Control

• Picture Reset

Position
Size

• TruMotion
• Screen (RGB-PC)

Auto Config.

ꔉ
ꔀ

• LED Local Dimming : On

Phase
Reset

1
2
3
4
5

Select PICTURE.

ENTER

Select Screen (RGB-PC).

ENTER

Select Resolution.

ENTER

Select the desired resolution.

ENTER

ꔂ Move

ꔑ 1024 x 768
□ 1280 x 768
□ 1360 x 768

� Prev.

Auto Configure

Screen Reset (Reset to original initial values)
Returns Position, Size, and Phase to the default initial settings.
This feature operates only in RGB-PC mode.

PICTURE

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Color

• Tint

• Color Temp.

• Advanced Control

• Picture Reset
ꔉ
ꔀ

• LED Local Dimming : On

1
2
3
4
5

Select PICTURE.

ꔂ Move

Select Screen (RGB-PC).

ENTER

Select Auto Config. or
Reset.

ENTER

Select Yes.

SCREEN
Resolution

Auto Config.

Size

Auto Config.
Yes

Size
Phase

Reset

ꔛ

ꔂ Move

Position

Phase

ꔛ
ENTER

� Prev.

Resolution

Position

• TruMotion
• Screen (RGB-PC)

SCREEN

� Prev.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

Automatically adjusts picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the image
is still not correct, try using the manual settings or a different resolution or refresh rate on the PC.

To Set
Yes

If the position of the image is still not
correct, try Auto adjustment again.
If picture needs to be adjusted again
after Auto adjustment in RGB-PC,
you can adjust the Position, Size or
Phase.

ENTER

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Adjustment for screen Position, Size, and Phase
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment or if text is shaking, adjust the picture phase manually.
This feature operates only in RGB-PC mode.

PICTURE

ꔂ Move

SCREEN

ꔉ Enter

• Color

• Tint

• Color Temp.

• Advanced Control

• Picture Reset

ꔂ Move

� Prev.

Resolution
▲

Auto Config.
Position

• TruMotion
• Screen (RGB-PC)

◀

▶

Size

ꔉ
ꔀ

▼

Phase

• LED Local Dimming : On

Reset

1
2
3

Select PICTURE.

ENTER

Select Screen (RGB-PC).

ENTER

Select Position, Size, or Phase.

ꔛ

4
5

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.

Position: This function is to adjust
picture to left/right and up/down as
you prefer.
Size: This function is to minimize any
vertical bars or stripes visible on the
screen background. And the horizontal screen size will also change.
Phase: This function allows you to
remove any horizontal noise and
clear or sharpen the image of characters.

NETWORK SETUP
Wired Network Connection

RGB IN (PC)

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

ꔡ

AUDIO IN

WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
VIDEO

Broadband modem

Broadband Service

AUDIO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

This TV can be connected to a local area network (LAN) via the LAN port. After making the physical
connection, the TV needs to be set up for network communication.

Router

Broadband modem

Broadband Service

1. How to connect
1

Connect the LAN port of the Modem or Router to the LAN port on the TV.

2. How to use
ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
After connecting the LAN port, use the NETCAST menu.
For more information about NETCAST setup and troubleshooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.
com. Search for NETCAST.

CAUTION
► Do not connect a modular phone cable to the LAN port.
► Since there are various connection methods, please follow the specifications of your telecommunication carrier or internet service provider.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wired Network Setup
If wired and wireless networks are both available, wired is the preferred method.
After making a physical connection, a small number of home networks may require the TV network
settings to be adjusted.
For detail information, contact your internet provider or router manual.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

NETWORK

ꔂ Move

If you already set the
Network Setting

ꔉ Enter

• Network Setting

: Wired

• Network Status

Wired network is recommended
: Internet is connected
Wired

• Legal Notice

Previous setting value exists. Do
you want to connect with the
previous setting?

Network Type

• ESN

Enter

Wireless

Resetting
ꔉ Next

Appeared when wired and
wireless are simultaneously
connected.

IP Auto Setting
Network Setting
Network Status

IP Mode
Network connecting

Setting

Test

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�IP Address

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�Subnet Mask

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�Gateway

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�Gateway

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�DNS Server

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�DNS Server

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

Enter

ENTER

Select Wired.

ꔛ

4
5

ENTER

If you already set Network Setting:
Select Resetting. The new connection
settings resets the current network
settings.

ENTER

Select IP Auto Setting or IP Manual
Setting.
1

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
0

6
48

ENTER

When Selecting IP Manual Setting:
IP addresses will need to be input
manually.
Select Enter.

Enter
ꕯ Exit

ꔛ

Select Network Setting.

◀ IP Manual Setting ▶

�Subnet Mask

ENTER

IP Mode

�IP Address

Select NETWORK.

Insert the IP address.

◀ IP Auto Setting ▶

ꕉ Previous

IP Manual Setting
Network Setting

Select the IP setting mode.

ꕯ Exit

ꔛ

ꕉ Previous

ꕯ Exit

This feature requires an always-on
broadband internet connection.
You do not need to connect to a PC
to use this function.
If Network Setting is not working,
check your network conditions. Check
the LAN cable and make sure your
router has DHCP turned on if you
wish to use the Auto Setting.
If the Network Setting is not completed, network may not operate normally.
IP Auto Setting: Select it if there is a
DHCP server on the local area network (LAN) via wired connection, the
TV will automatically be allocated an
IP address. If you are using a router,
it (normally) will have the DHCP
server activated by default.
IP Manual Setting: Select it if there is
no DHCP server on the network and
you want to set the IP address manually.

► For more information about NETCAST setup
and troubleshooting, visit http://lgknowledge? base.com. Search for NETCAST.
► Use a standard LAN cable with this TV. Cat5
or better with a RJ45 connector.
► Many network connection problems during set
up can often be fixed by re-setting the router
or modem. After connecting the player to the
home network, quickly power off and/or disconnect the power cable of the home network
router or cable modem. Then power on and/or
connect the power cable again.
► Depending on the internet service provider
(ISP), the number of devices that can receive
internet service may be limited by the applicable terms of service. For details, contact
your ISP.
► LG is not responsible for any malfunction of
the TV and/or the internet connection feature
due to communication errors/malfunctions
associated with your broadband internet connection, or other connected equipment.
► LG is not responsible for problems within your
internet connection.
► Some content available through the network
connection may not be compatible with the
TV. If you have questions about such content,
please contact the producer of the content.
► You may experience undesired results if the
network connection speed does not meet the
requirements of the content being accessed.
► Some internet connection operations may not
be possible due to certain restrictions set by
the Internet service provider (ISP) supplying
your broadband Internet connection.
► Any fees charged by an ISP including, without
limitation, connection charges are your responsibility.
► A 10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port is
required for connection to this TV. If your internet service does not allow for such a connection, you will not be able to connect the TV.
► A DSL modem is required to use DSL service
and a cable modem is required to use cable
modem service. Depending on the access
method of and subscriber agreement with
your ISP, you may not be able to use the internet connection feature contained in this TV or
you may be limited to the number of devices
you can connect at the same time. (If your ISP
limits subscription to one device, this TV may
not be allowed to connect when a PC is
already connected.)

► The use of a “Router” may not be allowed or
its usage may be limited depending on the
policies and restrictions of your ISP. For details,
contact your ISP directly.
► The wireless network operates at 2.4 GHz
radio frequencies that are also used by other
household devices such as cordless telephone, Bluetooth® devices, microwave oven,
and can be affected by interference from
them. It can be interrupted by the device
using 5Ghz radio frequencies. It is same
device with LG wireless media box, cordless
telephone, other Wi-Fi device.
► It may decrease the service speed using
Wireless network by surrounding wireless condition.
► Turn off all unused network equipment in your
local home network. Some devices may generate network traffic.
► In some instances, placing the access point or
wireless router higher up away from the floor
may improve the reception.
► The reception quality over wireless depends
on many factors such as type of the access
point, distance between the TV and access
point, and the location of the TV.
► When connecting internet through the wired/
wireless sharing machine, it may interrupt the
connection because of the use limitation and
confirmation of service company.
► To connect wireless AP, an AP that supports
the wireless connection is necessary, and the
wireless connection function of the AP needs
to be activated. Please enquire to the AP supplier for the possibility of AP wireless connections.
► Please verify the security settings of AP SSID
for wireless AP connection, and enquire to the
AP supplier for the AP SSID security settings.
► The TV can become slower or malfunction
with wrong settings of network equipments
(wired/wireless router, hub, etc). Please install
correctly by referring to the manual of the
equipment, and set the network.
► When AP is set to include 802.11 n, and if
Encryption is designated as WEP(64/128bit)
or WPA(TKIP/AES), the connection may not
be possible. There may be different connection methods according to the AP manufacturers.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

! NOTE

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wireless Network Connection

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R H/P

IN 4

USB IN 1

USB IN 2

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

The LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor, which is sold separately, allows the TV to connect
to a wireless lan network.
The network configuration and connection method may vary depending on the equipment in use and
the network environment. Refer to the setup instructions supplied with your access point or wireless
router for detailed connection steps and network settings.

AV IN 2

1. How to connect
1

Connect the “LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor (LED LCD TV: sold separately)” to the USB IN 1 or 2 port on the TV.

2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ

Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
After connecting, you can use the NETCAST menu.

! NOTE
►We recommend you use a wired network connection when available when viewing movies over the
network connection.

?
►When
the wireless port of the router is used, there may be restrictions for some functions.

Wireless Network Setup
Setting up the AP (Access Point) or the wireless router is required before connecting the TV to the
network.

ꔂ Move

• Network Setting

: Wired

• Network Status

: Internet is connected

ꔉ Enter

Network Type
Wired network is recommended

• Legal Notice
• ESN

Selecting the wireless network setting type

Previous setting value exists. Do
you want to connect with the
previous setting?

Wired

Enter

Wireless

Resetting

Select the wireless network setting type.
Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next

ꕯ Exit

ꔉ Next

ꕉ Previous

ꕯ Exit

Appeared when wired and wireless
are simultaneously connected.

If your AP is locked

Network Setting

IP Mode

◀ IP Auto Setting ▶

�IP Address

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�Subnet Mask

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�Gateway

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�DNS Server

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

1
2
3

Page 1/1

Input the new SSID

Insert 8~63 ASCII characters

◀

ꕯ Exit

Cancel

ꔉ Next

ꕉ Prev.

ENTER

Select Network Setting.

ENTER

Access Point
Search

� Connecting with PIN mode
Enter

Select NETWORK.

ENTER

iptime

Network1

Select Wireless.
If you already set Network
Setting: Select Resetting.
The new connection settings
resets the current network settings.

ꕉ Previous

ꕯ Exit

ENTER

7
8

▶

ASW

ENTER

Select AP you want to connect.

Insert the security key of AP.

Enter
ꕉ Previous

Selecting AP

Inserting the security key

Select the IP setting mode.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

NETWORK

If you already set the
Network Setting

Scan the all available AP (Access
Point) or wireless routers within range
and display them as a list.

ENTER

Select an AP (Access Point) or
wireless router on the list.
(If your AP is locked, insert the
security key of AP).

ENTER

Input the security key of AP.

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

ꕯ Exit

Repeat step 4-5 on P.48.

Select Setting from the AP list.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
When a security code is already set
PIN (Personal Identification Number)
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

If you want to connect the AP (Access Point) or router with PIN, use this feature.
Selecting AP

Connecting with PIN mode

Select AP you want to connect.
Page 1/1

Insert PIN number at the AP webpage and
press ‘Connect’ button.

Input the new SSID

PIN NUBMER : 12345670

iptime

Connect

ASW

Access Point
Search

Network1

For more information, check the AP manual.

ꔉ Next

� Connecting with PIN mode

ꕉ Previous

ꔉ Next

ꕉ Previous

1
2
3

ꕯ Exit

Repeat step 1-6 on P.51.
RED

ꕯ Exit

Connect the acccess point with PIN
mode.

You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
Enter the PIN number to your device.

5
ꔛ

Select Connect.

ENTER

Repeat step 4-5 on P.48.
PIN number is the unique 8 digit number
of the dongle.

Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Use the simple setting if your access point or wireless router supports a PIN or WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup)
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the wireless network setting type.

Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Press PBC Mode button of AP and press ‘Connect’ button.

Setting from the AP list
Connect

Simple setting (WPS-button mode)

Caution: Check if PBC mode button is available for your AP.

Setting Ad-hoc network

ꔉ Next

ꕉ Previous

1
2

ꕯ Exit

Repeat step 1-4 on P.51.

ENTER

Select Simple setting (WPSbutton mode).

ꕉ Previous

ꕯ Exit

3
4

ENTER

Select Connect.

Repeat step 4-5 on P.48.

AD-hoc Mode
The below settings are only for connecting directly to a PC.
This is the same as connecting two PCs with a cross-over cable.
Setting Ad-hoc network

Setting Ad-hoc network

Select the wireless network setting type.

Insert the setting information into the device.

Features using exiting network can be unavailable. Do you

Setting from the AP list

Network ID(SSID) : LGTV10

want to change network connection?

Security Key : 1111111111

Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Enter

Setting Ad-hoc network

Cancel

ꕉ Previous

� Changing the setting information.

ꔉ Next

ꕉ Previous

ꕯ Exit

Connect

ꕯ Exit

ꕉ Previous

IP Mode

Signal Strength

Gateway

Setting

Mac Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Test

Insert the setting information into the device.

Insert the IP address.

Adhoc network is connected.
(LGTV10)

: 00:00:13:64:23:01
: 10.19.152.115
: 255.255.254.0
: 10.19.152.1

Network ID(SSID) : LGTV10

IP Manual Setting

�IP Address

192 . 168 . 0 . 10

�Subnet Mask

255 . 255 . 255 . 0

�Gateway

192 . 168 . 0 . 1

�DNS Server

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

Security Key : 1111111111
Connecting the Ad-hoc network

Cancel

Enter

ꕯ Exit

PC Setting
Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) of PC needs to be set
manually.
IP address, Subnet Mask, and default Gateway
can be set with your own discretion.
i.e) IP address: 192.168.0.1 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default Gateway: 192.168.0.10
ꔛ
TV Setting
Verify IP address and gateway of PC.
Input Gateway address of PC to IP Address, and
IP Address of PC to Gateway, and select Enter.
i.e) IP address: 192.168.0.10 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default Gateway: 192.168.0.1
ꔛ

2
3
4

Repeat step 1-3 on P.51.
ENTER

ENTER

Select Setting AD-hoc network.
ENTER

Example of the PC setting that
supports a wireless network
1. Find a wireless network device in
your PC.
2. Select LGTV10 that appears in
the list. (Select the same name
as the network ID that appears
on your TV screen.)
3. Type 1111111111 in the Inserting
the security key dialog.
(Type the security key that
appears on your TV screen.)
ꔛ

ꕉ Previous

ꕯ Exit

Setting Ad-hoc network

Network Setting

Network Status

ꔉ Next

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

Selecting the wireless network setting type

5
6

ENTER

Insert the IP address.

ENTER

Network setting is completed.
Select Close.

Select Enter.

Select Connect to connect Ad-hoc
network.
You can see the Network ID and
Security Key on your TV screen.
Enter this Network ID and Security
Key to your device.
If a network may not operate,
change the setting information
using the RED button.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Network Status
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

NETWORK

ꔂ Move

Network Status

ꔉ Enter

• Network Setting

: Wired

• Network Status

: Internet is connected

Network connecting

• Legal Notice
• ESN

Setting

Test

Select the wireless network setting type.

Network Setting

Select the wireless network setting type.

Select the IP setting mode.
IP Mode

◀ IP Auto Setting ▶

�IP Address

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�Subnet Mask

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�Gateway

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

�DNS Server

255 . 255 . 0 . 0

Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next

ꕉ Previous

ꕯ Exit

Wireless Connection

Enter
ꕉ Previous

Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)

ꕯ Exit

Wired Connection

1
2
3

Select NETWORK.

ꔛ

ENTER

Select Network Status.

ꔛ

ꔛ
ENTER

Check the newtwork status.

Setting: Return to the network setting menu or wireless network setting
type menu.
Test: Test the current network status
after setting the network.
Close: Return to the previous menu.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
The remote control may differ from the images below.

Turns the TV on from standby or off to
standby.

LIGHT

Illuminates the remote control buttons.

ENERGY SAVING

Adjusts the Energy Saving setting.
►p.132

AV MODE

LIGHT

INPUT

ENERGY AV MODE INPUT

TV
SAVING

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
0

— (DASH)

FLASHBK

MARK

FAV

VOL

CHAR/NUM

RATIO
DELETE

MUTE
MENU

Q.MENU

P
A
G
E

LIST
FLASHBK
VOLUME UP/
DOWN

ENTER

BACK WIDGETS EXIT

Rotates through inputs.
Also switches the TV on from standby.
Returns to the last TV channel.

NUMBER button

7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
LIST

Toggles through preset Video and
Audio modes. ►p.85

FAV

Used to enter a program number for
multiple program channels such as 2-1,
2-2, etc.

MUTE
DELETE

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO

LIST

FLASHBK

MARK

FAV

CHAR/NUM

3D
DELETE

Adjusts the volume.

P
A
G
E

Q.MENU

ENTER

Set up desired favorite channels list.

Changes the aspect ratio.

CHAR/NUM

MUTE

Tunes to the last channel viewed.

RATIO
3D

TV
SAVING

VOL

Displays the channel table.

Select the input to apply the Picture
Wizard settings. ►p.131
Use to mark or unmark a photo/music/
movie. ►p.105, 110, 116

INFO

ENERGY AV MODE INPUT

7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

MARK
FREEZE

LIGHT

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

POWER

BACK WIDGETS EXIT
L/R SELECT

INFO

RATIO

►p.128

Used for viewing 3D video.

►p.94

Shifts the Character or Number in
internet settings.
Switches the sound on or off.
Delete the character or number on the
screen.

CHANNEL
UP/DOWN

Changes the channel.

PAGE
UP/DOWN

Moves from one full set of screen information to the next one.

LIGHT

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
ENERGY AV MODE INPUT

ENERGY AV MODE INPUT

SAVING

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO

7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

LIST

FLASHBK

MARK

FAV

VOL

CHAR/NUM

RATIO
DELETE

P
A
G
E

MUTE

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Q.MENU

ENTER

Select the desired NETCAST menu
source. ►p.123

Q.MENU

Opens the list of Quick Menu options.
►p.66

ENERGY AV MODE INPUT

BACK WIDGETS EXIT
SAVING

2 ABC 3 DEF
FREEZE

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO

Navigates the on-screen menus and
adjusts the system settings to your
preference.

BACK

Allows the user to move return one step
in an interactive application or other
user interaction function.

LIST

FLASHBK

WIDGETS

MARK

FAV

VOL

CHAR/NUM

RATIO
DELETE

MUTE
MENU

P
A
G
E

BACK INFO

EXIT

FREEZE

WIDGETS for showing or hiding the
Yahoo! Dock and accessing the Yahoo!
TV Widgets user experience.

INFO

Displays channel information at the
bottom of the screen. ►p.78

EXIT

Clears all on-screen displays and return
to TV viewing.

COLOR
BUTTON

Access special functions in some
menus.

Q.MENU

L/R SELECT

Used for viewing 3D video.

LIST

FLASHBK

MARK

FAV

VOL

CHAR/NUM

3D
DELETE

P
A
G
E

MUTE
MENU

Q.MENU
LIGHT

ENTER
ENERGY AV MODE INPUT

THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left
Right/ENTER)

7INFO
PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
0

Displays the main menu or clears all
on-screen displays and return to TV
viewing.

NETCAST

ENTER

TV
SAVING

BACK WIDGETS EXIT

2 ABC 3 DEF

L/R SELECT

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
INFO

LIST

0RATIO

FLASHBK

MARK

FAV

VOL

CHAR/NUM

3D
DELETE

P
A
G
E

MUTE
MENU

Q.MENU

ENTER

BACK INFO

EXIT
L/R SELECT

►p.95

RATIO

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO

7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
LIST

FLASHBK
LIST

MARK
CHAR/NUM

INPUT
ENERGY AV MODE
RATIO

SAVING

DELETE

MUTE

VOL

SAVING

USB,
SIMPLINK
Control buttons

LIST WIDGETS EXIT
BACK
MARK

FAV

P
A
G
E

MUTE
MENU
INFO

FREEZE

Q.MENU

(For Plasma TV)

ENTER

BACK INFO

EXIT

FREEZE

SIMPLINK

•C
ontrols MY MEDIA menu (Movie List,
Photo List, Music List)
• Controls the SIMPLINK compatible
devices.
Pause the present picture at the screen.
(It doesn’t work at USB Mode and
Simplink.)
The TV returns to normal viewing automatically if no signal is received or no
operation is performed for 5 minutes.
If you keep the screen in Freeze condition, the residual image can exist.
See a list of AV devices connected to
TV.
When you toggle this button, the
SIMPLINK menu appears at the screen.

LIST

FLASHBK

EXIT
BACK WIDGETS
MARK
FAV

VOL

CHAR/NUM

3D
DELETE

L/R SELECT

MUTE
MENU
INFO

Q.MENU
RATIO

ENTER

BACK INFO

EXIT
L/R SELECT

RATIO

►p.90

RATIO

Changes the aspect ratio.

P
A
G
E

►p.128

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

DELETE

P
A
G
E

ENTER

FLASHBK

FREEZE

DELETE

MUTE

7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

RATIO

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO

ENTER

VOL

CHAR/NUM

1MENU 2 ABC Q.MENU
3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO

CHAR/NUM

LIGHT

MARK

ENERGY AV MODE INPUT

P
A
G
E

1MENU 2 ABC Q.MENU
3 DEF

FLASHBK

FAV

VOL

Installing Batteries
ꔛ

ꔛ

Open the battery compartment cover on the back side and install
the batteries matching correct polarity.
Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Don’t mix old or used batteries
with new ones.
Close cover.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
MAGIC MOTION REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Pointer Receiver

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

POWER

ENTER

VOL

Blinks the light when operating.

Turns the TV on from standby or off to standby.

ENTER/HOME
Menu Button

Activates the pointer.

VOLUME UP/
DOWN

Adjusts the volume.

CHANNEL
UP/DOWN
MUTE

Changes the channel.
Switches the sound on or off.

MUTE

Installing Batteries
ꔛ

ꔛ

When the message "Magic motion
remote control battery is low. Change
the battery." is displayed, replace the
battery.
Open the battery compartment
cover on the back side and install the
batteries matching correct polarity.
Install two 1.5V AA batteries. Don’t
mix old or used batteries with new
ones.
Close cover.

RF Specification of the Magic Motion Remote Control
The Magic Motion Remote Control communicates with your TV by using a 2.4 GHz bandwidth radio
frequency (RF).
ꔛ Output: 1 dBm or lower
ꔛ Maximum Communication Distance: 10 m (30 ft) in an open space
ꔛ Bandwidth: 2.4 GHz (2.4035 GHz - 2.4783 GHz)
ꔛ Transfer Rate: 250 kbps

Magic Motion Remote Control Registration
The Magic Motion Remote Control operates by pairing with your TV.
Register the Magic Motion Remote Control after purchasing the TV.
ENTER

How to Re-register the Magic Motion Remote Control after
Registration Failure
Reset the remote control by pressing and holding both the
ENTER and MUTE buttons for 5 seconds. (Once the reset is
complete, the light on the Pointer RF Receiver blinks.) Then
repeat the above procedure to register the remote control.

How to use Magic Motion Remote Control
1

Press this button if there is no pointer on your TV screen. The pointer will then appear on the
screen.
If the pointer has not been used for a certain period of time, it will disappear.

ENTER

You can move the pointer by aiming the Pointer Receiver of the remote
control at your TV then move it left, right, up or down.
If the pointer does not work properly after clicking the ENTER button, leave
the remote control for 10 seconds then use it again.

INPUT

ENTER

VOL

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

MUTE

How to register the Magic Motion Remote Control
To register the Remote Control, press the ENTER button on the
Remote Control while aiming it at your TV.

Precautions to Take when Using the Magic Motion Remote Control
ꔛ

ꔛ

Use the remote control within the maximum communication distance (10 m). Using the remote control
beyond this distance, or with an object obstructing it,
may cause a communication failure.
A communication failure may occur due to nearby
devices. Electrical devices such as a microwave oven or
wireless LAN product may cause interference, as this
will use the same bandwidth (2.4 GHz) as the Magic
Motion Remote Control.
The Magic Motion Remote Control may be damaged
or may malfunction if it is dropped or receives a heavy
impact.
When playing a game using the Magic Motion Remote
Control, hold it securely by wrapping its strap around
your wrist and adjusting the length with the adjustable
ring.
Take care not to bump into nearby furniture or other
people when using the Magic Motion Remote Control.
Manufacturer and installer cannot provide service
related to human safety as the applicable wireless
device has possibility of electric wave interference.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Pointer Menu Options

Simple Manual

Exit

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Today
Today
Today
Today

Quick Menu

30
30
30

Channel List

SIMPLINK

NETCAST

INPUT

MY MEDIA

GAME/SCHEDULE QUICK MENU

Netcast
Screen Remote

• Speed

◀

Normal

▶

• Shape

◀

Type A

▶

• Size

◀

Medium

▶

• Alignment

◀

▶

� Exit

ꔛ
ENTER

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

ꔛ
ꔛ

2
3
4

Pointer

Home Menu

ꔛ
ENTER

Select Pointer.

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.

ENTER

Select Exit.

Speed: Changed the pointer speed.
Shape: Select the pointer shape.
Size: Changes the pointer size.
Alignment: When Alignment is On,
you can easily align the remote control's direction with the pointer on
your TV screen by shaking the remote
control left and right. Then, the pointer automatically moves to the center
of the screen.

TURNING ON THE TV
1

First, connect power cord correctly.
At this moment, the TV switches to standby mode.
In standby mode to turn TV on, press the / I, INPUT, CH (ꕌ or ꕍ) button on the TV or press
the , INPUT, CH (ꕌ or ꕍ), Number (0-9) button on the remote control.

ꔛ

Select the viewing source by using the INPUT button on the remote control.

When finished using the TV, press the POWER button on the remote control. The TV reverts
to standby mode.

! NOTE
► If you intend to be away on vacation, disconnect the power plug from the wall power outlet.

► If you do not complete the Initial setting, it will appear whenever the TV is switched on until the
? Initial setting procedure is completed.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

CHANNEL SELECTION
1

Press the CH (ꕌor ꕍ) or NUMBER buttons to select a channel number.

VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the volume to suit your personal preference.

Press the VOL (+ or -) button to adjust the volume.

If you want to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.

You can cancel the Mute function by pressing the MUTE or VOL (+ or -) button.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
INITIAL SETTING
This Function guides the user to easily set the essential items for viewing the TV for the first time
when purchasing the TV. It will be displayed on the screen when turning the TV on for the first time. It
can also be activated from the user menus.
ꔛ

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

ꔛ

Default selection is “Home Use”. We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use” mode for the best
picture in your home environment.
“Store Demo” Mode is only intended for use in retail environments. Customers can adjust the
“Picture menu - Picture mode” manually while inspecting the TV, but the TV will automatically
return to preset in-store mode after 5 minutes.
“Store Demo” Mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores. “Store Demo” mode initializes
the TV to set the image quality.

Step 1. Selecting Language
WELCOME!

Thank you for choosing LG

Step 1. Language

ENTER

Select Menu Language.

ENTER

Select Home Use.

English
Español
Français
한국어
ꔉ Next

Step 2. Mode setting
Step 2. Mode Setting

i Selecting the environment.
Choose the setting mode you want.
Select [Home Use] when setting TV up
in-home. You can adjust picture quality
accordingly through Picture Mode menu
option.
Home Use
• Demo Mode

Store Demo

◀

ꕉ Previous

For LED LCD TV

Off
ꔉ Next

▶

Step 3. Power Indicator (For LED LCD TV)
Step 3. Power Indicator
Standby Light

◀

▶

Off

ENTER

Select On or Off.

ꔉ Next

ꔛ

This function is disable in “Step2. Mode
Setting - Store Demo”.

Step 4. Time Zone
1

Step 4. Time Zone
Time Zone

◀

Eastern

▶

Daylight Saving

◀

Auto

▶

ꕉ Previous

ENTER

Select Time Zone option.

ENTER

Select Daylight Saving option.

ENTER

Check your antenna connection and start Auto Tuning.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

ꕉ Previous

ꔉ Next

Step 5. Auto Tuning

Before starting,
be sure that the
TV antenna is connected.

ꕉ Previous

ꔉ Next

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
ON-SCREEN MENUS SELECTION
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.

1
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Display each menu.

ENTER

Select a menu item.

CHANNEL

Accept the current selection.
Return to TV viewing.

EXIT

ꔂ Move

PICTURE

ꔉ Enter

• Auto Tuning

• Aspect Ratio

• Manual Tuning

• Picture Wizard

• Channel Edit

ꔂ Move

• Auto Volume

: Off

• Clear Voice II

: Off �3

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

: 16:9

• ꕊ Energy Saving : Off

PICTURE

AUDIO

ENTER

• Picture Mode

: Standard

• Backlight

• Contrast

100

• Brightness

• Sharpness

TIME

ꔉ Enter

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock

• Balance

• Sound Mode

: Standard

• Infinite Sound: Off

• Treble

• Bass

• Reset

TIME

• Off Time

: Off

• On TIme

: Off

• Sleep Timer

: Off

For USA
LOCK

ꔂ Move

OPTION

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

LOCK

• Language

• Lock System

: On

• Caption

• Block Channel

• Power Indicator

• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-Children

• Set ID

• TV Rating-General

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

• Downloadable Rating

• IR Blaster

: Off

• Input Block

ꔛ

• Set Password

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• TV Rating-English

• TV Rating-French

• Downloadable Rating

• Input Block

• Key Lock

: Off

• Initial Setting

OPTION

For Canada

: Off

For further information, refer to the
optional “Wireless Media Box”
manual for operating instructions.

! NOTE

► ISM Method: For Plasma TV.
► Backlight, TruMotion, LED Local Dimming,
? Power Indicator: For LED LCD TV.

NETWORK
• Network Setting

: None

• Network Status

: Not connected

ꔉ Enter

• Legal Notice
• ESN

Input List

ꔂ Move

USB1

USB2

AV 1

AV 2

Component1

Component2

RGB-PC

HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI3

HDMI4

INPUT

� Input Label

ꔉ Enter

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

NETWORK

ꔂ Move

ꕉ Exit

MY MEDIA

Today

Movie List

Photo List

Music List

GAME/SCHEDULE

GAME/SCHEDULE
WORLD TIME

SCHEDULE

SUDOKU

JIGSAW

INVADER

URGENT SURVIVAL

JUMP

HOLE IN ONE

WHACK A MOLE

COOKING BURGER BALLOON HUNTER SAVING CRYSTAL

ꕯ Exit

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
QUICK MENU
our TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from what is shown in this manual.
Y
Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

ꕁ Aspect Ratio: Selects your desired picture format.
ꕇ Picture Mode: Selects the desired preset picture setting.
ꕈ Sound Mode: Selects the desired preset sound setting.
ꔴ Multi Audio: Changes the audio language (Digital signal).
ꔴ SAP: Selects MTS sound (Analog signal).
ꔤSleep Timer: Select the amount of time before your TV turns off automatically.
ꔳ Del/Add: Select channel you want to add or delete.
ꕄ Caption: Select on or off.
ꔢ USB Device: Select “Eject” in order to eject a USB device.

Aspect Ratio
Home Menu
Quick Menu
Channel List

16:9 �

Netcast
Screen Remote

ꕉ Close

1
2
3

ENTER

Select Quick Menu.

ENTER

Select a menu item.

ENTER

Select Close.

ꔛ

Quick Menu can be selected either by
pressing the Q.MENU button on a
standard remote control, or by selecting on the Home Menu screen.

HOME MENU
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.

ENTER

Select a menu item.

Home Menu
Simple Manual

Pointer

Exit

Quick Menu
Channel List

Today
Today
Today
Today

30
30
30

Netcast

SIMPLINK

INPUT

NETCAST

MY MEDIA

GAME/SCHEDULE QUICK MENU

Screen Remote

SIMPLINK allows you to control and play other AV devices connected with HDMI
30
cable without additional cables and settings. This TV may work with devices with
HDMI-CEC support, but only devices with the
logo are fully supported.
Today

SIMPLINK

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

Today

Select the desired input source.
INPUT
Today

Select NETCAST menu option and enjoy Online Service.
NETCAST
Today

Used for viewing photos, watching movies and listening to MP3s.

MY MEDIA
Today

Allows you to enjoy the games installed on the TV or set the schedule.

GAME/SCHEDULE

Today

Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.
QUICK MENU
Simple Manual

Pointer
Exit

You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV.
Set up the Magic Motion Remote Control setting.
Close the Home menu.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Software Update

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

You can update the TV with the latest software to enhance the product operation and/or add new features.
You can update the software by connecting the TV directly to the software update server.
The Software Update function may not work properly depending on your internet environment. In this
case, you can obtain the latest software from the authorized LG Electronics Service Center then update
your TV.
ꔑ Software Update
□ Picture Test

Software Update
• Current Version

□ Sound Test

01.00.09

□ Product/Service Info.
□ Network Test

Check Update Version

1
2
3

RED

Select Customer Support.

ENTER

Select Software Update.

ENTER

Select Check Update Version to check
the newest version.
When selecting “Software Update-On”
- If the TV is connected to the internet
and it finds a software update on the
LG server, the update popup menu will
appear automatically.
- If the updated digital software information is transmitted, the update popup
menu will appear automatically.

ꔛ

The software downloading time will
vary depending on the software size
and network conditions.
During the software update procedure, do not turn off the TV or disconnect AC power, or disconnect the
LAN cable.
After software update, you can confirm the update software version at
software Update menu.
When update is completed, the TV
will restart automatically in 5 seconds.
The TV functions may be improved
or changed by software update.
The available time or functionality of
NetCast menu may be depends on
your ISP network conditions.
When an update is completed, some
CHANNEL, PICTURE, and AUDIO
menu settings may need resetting.
This TV cannot be updated to previous software version.
Use the “Check Update Version” button to update the latest software on
the Network server manually.
You cannot open NetCast while the
software is being updated.

Picture Test/Sound Test
This function is a customer support function that can execute picture and sound tests.

ꔑ Picture Test
□ Sound Test

? Do you have a problem in this test
screen?

□ Product/Service Info.
□ Network Test

Yes

□ Software Update
□ Picture Test
ꔑ Sound Test

? Do you have a sound problem in this
screen?

□ Product/Service Info.
□ Network Test
Close

2
3
4
BACK

EXIT

RED

Select Customer Support.

ENTER

Select Picture Test or Sound Test.

ENTER

Select Yes.

Yes

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

□ Software Update

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Product/Service Info.
This function shows support and product information.
Customer Service Center can differ by country.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

2
3
BACK

EXIT

RED

Select Customer Support.

ENTER

Select Product/Service Info..
You can check the various
product/Service infomation
based on your model.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

Network Test
Check the newtwork status.
Network Status

□ Picture Test

□ Sound Test

Network connecting

□ Product/Service Info.
ꔑ Network Test
Close
Setting

2
3

ENTER

RED

Select Customer Support.

ENTER

Select Network Test.

Test

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

□ Software Update

Check the newtwork status.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
SIMPLE MANUAL
You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV.
During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

1
2
3
3

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

ꔛ
ꔛ

ENTER

Select Simple Manual.

ENTER

Select the part of the manual you
would like to see.

ENTER

Select Exit.

RED: Go to the Index page.
BLUE: Play the Simple Manual automatically or manually.

CHANNEL SETUP
Auto Scan (Auto Tuning)

CHANNEL

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Auto Tuning
• Manual Tuning
• Channel Edit

ꔉ

ꔡ

CHANNEL
• Auto Tuning
• Manual Tuning

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

Antenna

Cable

• Channel Edit
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto Tuning.

Start
Close

1
2
3
4

Select CHANNEL.

ENTER

Select Auto Tuning.

ENTER

Select Start.

ꔛ

ꔛ
ENTER

5
BACK

EXIT

Run Auto tuning.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Automatically finds all channels available through antenna or cable inputs, and stores them in memory
on the channel list.
Run this function if you change your residence or move the TV.
Auto Tuning memorizes only the channels available at the time.

The TV will ask for a password if
parental control has been activated
(LOCK Menu). Use the password you
set up in the LOCK Menu to allow a
channel search.
The maximum number of channels
the TV can store is 1000.
Found channels are grouped in the
order of DTV, TV, Cable DTV and
Cable TV.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Add/Delete Channel (Manual Tuning)
When selecting DTV or Cable DTV input signal in Manual Tuning, you can view the on-screen signal
strength monitor to see the quality of the signal being received.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

CHANNEL

ꔉ Enter

• Auto Tuning
• Manual Tuning
• Channel Edit

CHANNEL
• Auto Tuning

ꔉ
ꔀ

• Manual Tuning
• Channel Edit

ꔂ Move

◀

ꔉ Enter

▶

DTV

Select channel type and RF-channel
number.
2

Channel
DTV 2-1
• Signal Strength
• Signal Quality

88%

Delete
Close

1
2
3

Select CHANNEL.

ENTER

Select Manual Tuning.

ENTER

Select DTV, TV, Cable DTV,
or Cable TV.

ꔛ

Select channel you want to
add or delete.

ENTER

6
BACK

EXIT

ꔂ Move

Select Add or Delete.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

Channel Editing
The channels in the Channel Edit List are displayed in black and the channels deleted from the Channel
Edit List are displayed in blue.

Channel Edit

CHANNEL

ꔂ Move

• Auto Tuning
• Channel Edit

2
3

Select CHANNEL.

ENTER

Select Channel Edit.

ENTER

Select a channel.

BLUE

YELLOW

ENTER

P
A
G
E

5
BACK

EXIT

A
TV

Page 1/1

Cable DTV

Cable TV

5-1

7-1

ꔠ
ꔉ

DTV
3-1

• Manual Tuning

Favorite Group :

ꔉ Enter

ꔉ CH.Change

ꘂ Favorite Ch.

ꔂ Navigation

ꘃ Page Change

ꔛ

� Favorite Ch. Group

ꕉ Previous

ꔅ Block/Unblock

ꔅ Add/Delete

Keep pressing the ꕌ button and use
the < or > buttons to move between
DTV, TV, Cable DTV and Cable TV.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

When a channel number is deleted, it means that you will be unable to select it using CH∧∨button
during TV viewing. If you wish to select the deleted channel, directly enter the channel number with the
NUMBER buttons or select it in the Channel Edit menu.

Add or delete a channel.
Block or unblock the channel.
You can block/unblock channels even if
you select “Lock system-Off” in the LOCK
menu.
Switch to the chosen channel number.
Move the pages when the channel list is
too long.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL LIST
You can check which channels are stored in the memory by displaying the channel list.

Channel List

Home Menu
Quick Menu

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Channel List

3-1

DTV

4-1

ꔒꔉ

Netcast
Screen Remote

ꔅ Ch.Edit
ꘂ Favorite List

1
2

DTV

ENTER

ꕉ Exit

Select Channel List.

ENTER

Select a channel you want to switch.

BLUE

Tune to the “CHANNEL menu Channel Edit”.

ENTER

Select Exit.

This padlock is displayed
when the channel is locked
with parental control.

FAVORITE CHANNEL SETUP
Favorite Channels are a convenient feature that lets you quickly select channels of your choice without
waiting for the TV to select all the in-between channels.

Quick Menu
Channel List

DTV

3-1

DTV

4-1

◀

ꔒꔉ

ꔊꔋFavorite Ch. Group

▶

Group A

DTV

3-1

DTV

4-1

ꔉ

Netcast
Screen Remote

ꔅ Ch.Edit
ꘂ Favorite List

1
2
3
4
5
6

ENTER

ꕉ Exit

Select Channel List.

ENTER

Select Favorite List.

ENTER

Select your desired favorite channel
group from A to D.

ENTER

Select your desired channel.

ENTER

Select Ch.Reg to register or cancel
the current channel in favorite channel list.

ENTER

Select Exit.

ꔛ

ꔅ Ch.Reg.

ꔅ Ch.Edit

LIST Channel List
ꔅ

ꕉ Exit

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Favorite List

Channel List

Home Menu

You can also setup Favorite List in
the CHANNEL menu - Channel Edit.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL INFORMATION
ꔖ DTV 8-1 CNN

ꔀ Ch. Change

▶ Next

ꔉ Watch

ꕯ Exit

Brief Info Title Test...

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

10:10 AM

No information
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
with regular and special guests.
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
�

Displaying Channel Information
1

INFO

Show the current channel program Information on the screen.
Show a previous or next channel’s program information

3
EXIT

11:40 AM ꔥ Multilingual ꔨ ꔯ Caption ꔷ 1080i ꔒ TV-PG D L S V

Return to TV viewing.

ꔅ Up
ꔅ Down

CHANNEL BRIEF INFORMATION
Brief Info shows the present screen information.

Shows the current channel’s brief info screen.

ENTER

Return to TV viewing.

8-1

ꔖ DTV

Brief Info Title Test...
10:10 AM

ꘋꔫ

CNN

Sun, Feb 21, 2010 10: 40 AM
11:40 AM ꔥ Multilingual ꔨ ꔯ Caption ꔷ 1080i ꔒ TV-PG D L S V

Next - 11:40 AM

News

ꔥ

Multilingual : The program contains two or more audio services. Use the Q.MENU menu to select wanted Audio.

ꔯ

Caption : The program contains one or more caption services.
Use the Q.MENU menu to select wanted Closed caption.

ꔨ

Dolby Digital: The program contains a Dolby Digital audio
signal in TV and HDMI input source.

ꔶ

The original aspect ratio of the video is 4:3

ꔷ

The original aspect ratio of the video is 16:9 (wide)

480i
480p
720p
1080i
1080p

ꔒ

The
The
The
The
The

video
video
video
video
video

resolution
resolution
resolution
resolution
resolution

is
is
is
is
is

Program title

Day, Month, Year,

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

ENTER

Present time
3

Program start time

Program progress
bar

Program finish
time

Banner information

720x480i
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
1920x1080p

V-Chip: The program contains V-Chip information. Refer to
the LOCK menu: A (Age), D (Dialogue), L (Language), S (Sex),
V (Violence), FV (Fantasy Violence)

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
INPUT LIST
Only these input signals which are connected to a TV can be activated and selected.
Simple Manual

Home Menu
Quick Menu

Exit

Today
Today
Today

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

30
30
30
30
Today

Channel List

SIMPLINK

INPUT

Netcast

NETCAST

MY MEDIA

GAME/SCHEDULE QUICK MENU

Screen Remote

i.e)
Input List

ꔂ Move

USB1

USB2

AV 1

AV 2

Component1

Component2

RGB-PC

HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI3

HDMI4

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

ꔛ

Select INPUT.
ꔛ

ꔛ

ENTER

Select the desired input source.

ENTER

Select Exit.

When new external device is connected, this popup
menu is displayed automatically.
If selecting Yes, you can select input source that you
want to appreciate.
But, when selecting “SIMPLINK - On”, popup menu for
HDMI input will not be displayed.

Disconnected inputs are inactive
(grayed out)

ꕉ Exit

ꔛ
ENTER

ꔉ Enter

� Input Label

Pointer

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

TV: Select it to watch over-the-air,
cable and digital cable broadcasts.
USB: Select it to use movie, photo, or
music files.
AV: Select them to watch a VCR or
other external equipment.
Component: Select them to watch
DVD or a Digital set-top box.
RGB-PC: Select it to view PC input.
HDMI: Select them to watch high
definition devices.

AV1

New external input is connected.
Do you want to use this?

Yes

INPUT LABEL
This indicates which device is connected to which input port.

Simple Manual

Quick Menu

30
30
30
30
Today

SIMPLINK

Netcast
Screen Remote

INPUT

NETCAST

◀

AV2

◀

▶

Component1

◀

▶

Component2

◀

▶

RGB-PC

◀

▶

USB1

USB2

AV 1

AV 2

Component1

Component2

RGB-PC

HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI3

HDMI4

4
5

� Input Label

ENTER

ꔉ Enter

▶

AV1

VCR

ꔂ Move

GAME/SCHEDULE QUICK MENU

Input List

ꔍ

MY MEDIA

i.e)

Input Label

ENTER

Exit

Today
Today
Today

Channel List

Pointer

Select Home Menu.

ENTER

Select INPUT.

ENTER

Select Input Label.

ENTER

Select the desired input source and
then select ◀ ▶ to choose the input
label.

ENTER

Select Exit.

ꔛ

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Home Menu

ꕉ Exit

You can also select the Input label
using the BLUE button on the TV
remote control.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULT (INITIAL SETTING)
This function resets the TV to factory default and erases all stored channels.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

OPTION

ꔉ Enter

• Language
• Caption

ꔂ Move

• Caption
ꔉ
ꔀ

• Initial Setting

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

Select OPTION.

ꔛ

ENTER

Select Initial Setting.

ꔛ

ENTER

Select Yes.

ENTER

ꔉ Enter

: Off

• Power Indicator

• Initial Setting

OPTION
• Language

: Off

• Power Indicator

ꔂ Move

TV turns off automatically and starts
factory reset.

All user settings and channel settings will
be reset. Still continue?

Yes

When selecting “Lock System - On”
in the LOCK menu, the message to
enter the password appears.
If you forget your password, press
“0-3-2-5” on the remote control.

MODE SETTING
Default selection is “Home Use”. We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use” mode for the best
picture in your home environment.

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
• Caption

OPTION

ꔂ Move

• Language
: Off

• Caption

• Power Indicator

i Selecting the environment.
Choose the setting mode you want.

: Off

• Power Indicator

• Initial Setting

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

ꔠ
ꔉ

ꔉ Enter

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

Select [Home Use] when setting TV up
in-home. You can adjust picture quality
accordingly through Picture Mode menu
option.
Home Use

Store Demo

• Demo Mode

Off
Close

For LED LCD TV

1
2
3

Select OPTION.

ENTER

Select Mode Setting.

ENTER

Select Home Use.

4
BACK

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.

ꔛ

“Store Demo” Mode is only intended
for use in retail environments.
Customers can adjust the “Picture
menu - Picture mode” manually while
inspecting the TV, but the TV will
automatically return to preset instore mode after 5 minutes.
“Store Demo” Mode is an optimal
setting for displaying at stores. “Store
Demo” mode initializes the TV to set
the image quality.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

OPTION

Return to TV viewing.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
DEMO MODE
Displays a slide show to explain the various feature of this TV.

OPTION

ꔉ Enter

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

• Language
• Caption

OPTION

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
: Off

• Caption

• Power Indicator

i Selecting the environment.
Choose the setting mode you want.

: Off

• Power Indicator

• Initial Setting

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

ꔠ
ꔉ

Select [Store Demo] for in-store dsplay. For use
in-home, select [Home Use].

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Store Demo

Home Use

Store Demo

• Demo Mode

Off
Close

1
2
3

Select OPTION.

ENTER

Select Mode Setting.

ENTER

Select Store Demo.

ENTER

5
EXIT

ꔂ Move

Select On.

Return to TV viewing.
After a while, Demo Mode. starts.
If you want to stop the demo, press any
button (Except VOL +, - and MUTE button).

ꔛ

This feature is disabled in “Home Use”.

AV MODE
AV Mode toggles through preset Video and Audio settings.

Press button to run the selected
function.

Home Menu
Quick Menu
Channel List
Netcast
Screen Remote

1
2
3

ENTER

Select Screen Remote.

ENTER

Select AV MODE.

ENTER

Select AV MODE repeatedly to select
your desired menu option.

ENERGY
SAVING

Mode
AVAVMODE

INPUT

FAV

Q.MENU

SIMPLINK

Enter

LIST

FLASHBK

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Screen Remote

If you select “Cinema / ꔧ Cinema”
in AV mode, Cinema / ꔧ Cinema
will be selected both for “PICTURE
menu - Picture Mode” and “AUDIO
menu - Sound Mode” respectively.
If you select “Off” in AV mode, the
“Picture Mode” and “Sound Mode”
return to previous selected value.
Off: Disables the AV MODE.
Cinema / ꔧ Cinema: Optimizes
video and audio for watching movies.
Sport: Optimizes video and audio for
watching sports events.
Game: Optimizes video and audio for
playing games.
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select your desired menu
option.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
GAME/SCHEDULE
World Time
This function operates only if the current time has been set.
Simple Manual

Exit

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Today
Today
Today

Quick Menu

30
30
30

Today

Channel List

SIMPLINK

INPUT

NETCAST

MY MEDIA

GAME/SCHEDULE

QUICK MENU

Netcast
Screen Remote

GAME/SCHEDULE

World Clock

USA

Eastern, USA

Washington D.C

2010/01/01(Fri.) 00:00

� Move

� Select Region

ENTER

ꔅ City List

ENTER

2010/01/01(Fri.)
00:00

ꕉ Previous

WORLD TIME

SCHEDULE

SUDOKU

JIGSAW

INVADER

URGENT SURVIVAL

Select Home Menu.

3
4
5

ENTER

Select GAME/SCHEDULE.

ENTER

Select WORLD TIME.

ENTER

Select a desired city.
You can check the world time.

ENTER

Select Exit.

JUMP

HOLE IN ONE

WHACK A MOLE

COOKING BURGER BALLOON HUNTER SAVING CRYSTAL

ꕯ Exit

ꔛ

Pointer

Home Menu

The day light saving is not shown at
the world clock.

Schedule
This function operates only if the current time has been set.
Simple Manual

Pointer

Exit

Today
Today
Today

Quick Menu

30
30
30

Today

Channel List

SIMPLINK

INPUT

NETCAST

MY MEDIA

GAME/SCHEDULE

QUICK MENU

Netcast
Screen Remote

GAME/SCHEDULE
Schedule

� Navigation
Sun.

Mon.

Tue.

Wed.

Thu.

� Add/Edit
Fri.

Sat.

WORLD TIME

SCHEDULE

SUDOKU

JIGSAW

INVADER

URGENT SURVIVAL

JUMP

HOLE IN ONE

WHACK A MOLE

COOKING BURGER BALLOON HUNTER SAVING CRYSTAL

Jul. 4

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Home Menu

Lunar May 23

ꔅ List view

ꔅ Picture change

∧
CH

Previous Month

CH
∨

Next Month

ꕯ Exit

1
2
3
4

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

ENTER

Select GAME/SCHEDULE.

ENTER

Select Schedule.

ENTER

Select a desired date.
You can check the schedule.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Schedule Registration
i.e)

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Add Schedule

Sun, Jul. 4

Grandfather

No
repeat

∧
CH

5
6

Solar/Lunar

Solar

� Navigation

Birthday

Notice

D-day

The day

Add a
D-Day

Previous Step

Sun.

Grandmother

Mon.

Tue.

Wed.

Thu.

� Add/Edit
Fri.

Sat.

Father

Son

Daughter

Memorial

Anniversary

Custom

Event

Father Birthday
Repeat

SCHEDULE

Person
Lunar 5.23

Mother

1/2

CH
∨

Test

Next Step

Travel

Meeting

ꔅ Save

Jul. 4
Custom

ꕉ Cancel

ENTER

Select the desired menu option.

ENTER

The icon is displayed.

ENTER

Select List View to use schedule.

ENTER

Select Exit.

Lunar May 23

ꔅ List view

ꔅ Picture change

∧
CH

Previous Month

CH
∨

Next Month

ꕯ Exit

Game
Allows you to enjoy the games installed on the TV.
Simple Manual

Pointer

Exit

Today
Today
Today

Quick Menu

30
30
30

Today

Channel List

SIMPLINK

INPUT

NETCAST

MY MEDIA

GAME/SCHEDULE

Netcast
Screen Remote

GAME/SCHEDULE

WORLD TIME

SCHEDULE

SUDOKU

JIGSAW

INVADER

URGENT SURVIVAL

JUMP

HOLE IN ONE

WHACK A MOLE

QUICK MENU

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Home Menu

COOKING BURGER BALLOON HUNTER SAVING CRYSTAL

ꕯ Exit

1
2
3
4

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

ENTER

Select GAME/SCHEDULE.

ENTER

Enter the selected game mode.

ENTER

Select Exit.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
SIMPLINK
SIMPLINK allows you to control and play other AV devices connected with HDMI cable without additional cables and settings. This TV may work with devices with HDMI-CEC support, but only devices
with the
logo are fully supported.
SIMPLINK can be turned on and off in the user menus.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

Home Menu
Simple Manual

Channel List

Exit

Today
Today
Today

30
30
30

Today

Netcast
SIMPLINK

Screen Remote

NETCAST

INPUT

MY MEDIA

ꔉ Enter ꕉ Exit

◀ ◀

▶ ▶

On
Watch TV
◀ DISC 1

▶

◀ VCR 1

▶

HDD/DVD-R

HD HT

HDD Recorder
◀ Speaker

TV Speaker

ꕉ Exit

1
2
3
4

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

ENTER

Select SIMPLINK.

ENTER

Select On.

ENTER

Select the desired device.

5
ENTER

Pointer

Quick Menu

Control connected AV devices.

▶

GAME/SCHEDULE QUICK MENU

ꔉ Enter ꕉ Exit

◀ ◀
1

▶ ▶

On
Watch TV

◀ DISC 1

▶

►When no device is connected (displayed in gray)

◀ VCR 1

▶

►Selected Device

HDD/DVD-R

HD HT

HDD Recorder

◀ Speaker

TV Speaker

▶

►When a device is conected (displayed in bright
color)

ꕉ Exit

SIMPLINK Functions
ꔛ

ꔛ

Direct Play: After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media
without additional settings.
Select AV device: Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV.

WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL

TV viewing: Switch to the previous TV
channel regardless of the current
mode.
DISC playback: Select and play discs.
When multiple discs are available, the
disc devices are conveniently displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
VCR playback: Control the connected
VCR.
HDD Recordings playback: Control
recordings stored in HDD.
Audio Out to Home Theater speaker/
Audio Out to TV: Select Home Theater
speaker or TV speaker for Audio Out.

Disc playback: Control connected AV devices by pressing the ꕌꕍ< >, ENTER, ꕖ, ꕗ, ꕘ, ꕚ and ꕙ buttons.
ꔛ Power off all devices: When you power off the TV, all connected devices are turned off.
ꔛ Switch audio-out: Offers an easy way to switch audio-out.
ꔛ Sync Power on: When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play,
The TV will automatically turn on.
Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an High Speed HDMI cable with *CEC function should be used. (*CEC:
Consumer Electronics Control).
(A device, which is connected to the TV through a HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK, does
not provide this function)
ꔛ

! NOTE
► Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the rear terminal (HDMI terminal) of
the SIMPLINK device with the HDMI cable
? When you switch the Input source with the INPUT button on the remote control, the SIMPLINK
►
device will stop.
► When you select a device with home theater functionality, the sound output automatically switches
to the home theater speakers and the TV speakers are turned off.
► If a connected SIMPLINK home theater system doesn’t play the audio from the TV, connect the
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of the TV to the DIGITAL AUDIO IN terminal on the
back of the SIMPLINK device with an OPTICAL cable.

3D
3D VIDEO
VIDEO (FOR LED LCD TV)
3D VIDEO
This TV can display 3D video when received from a compatible device. 3D video contains two pictures
for each video frame formatted for each eye. Therefore, special 3D glasses are required to view 3D
video.

3D VIDEO

►On initial power on after turning the power on, the may need a few seconds to calibrate with the TV.
► It may take some time to see standard stereoscopic if you look at other places and stereoscopic again
while watching stereoscopic.
► It may flicker slightly on TV while watching stereoscopic under 3 wavelength lamp fluorescent light(50
Hz~60 Hz) or around windows. If so, it is recommended to block the sun light with a curtain and to
turn lights low.
►When watching with other company’s 3D glasses, the 3D video may not work normally.
►If there is an obstacle between the emitter and the 3D glasses, 3D vision cannot be viewed normally.
►Use TV as far as possible from other electronic equipments and IR equipments.

Caution when viewing 3D Video
►When viewing 3D video, watch the TV within effective viewing angle and distance.
- If you exceed the viewing angle or distance, you may not be able to view the 3D video.
►If the receiving range is out of the specified range, the screen may not be viewable as 3D video. When
watching while lying down, the screen may not be visible.
►If you watch the 3D video too closely for a long period of time, it may hurt you eyesight.
►Watching TV or game screen with the 3D video glasses for a long period of time can cause drowsiness
or fatigue to your eyes. If you feel headache, fatigue or drowsiness, stop watching TV and take a rest.
►Pregnant woman, senior, person with heart problem or frequent drowsiness should refrain from watching 3D video.
►Some 3D video may cause you to duck or dodge the image in the video. Do not watch 3D video near
fragile objects or any objects that can be knocked over easily.
► Please prevent children under the age of 5 from watching 3D video. It may affect their vision development.
►Warning for photosensitization seizure
Specific image from the video game and light or specific pattern from the video can cause a seizure to
some individuals. If you or anybody from your family has a history of epilepsy or seizure, please consult
your doctor before watching 3D video.
Also the following symptoms can occur in unspecified conditions without any previous history.
- If you experience dizziness, visual transition, visual or facial instability, unconscious action, convulsion,
loss of conscience, confusion, loss of directional sense or nausea during or after watching the 3D video,
immediately stop watching the 3D video and consult the doctor.
Risk of photosensitization seizure can be reduced with the following actions.
- Take 5-15 minutes of break for every 1 hour watched.
-F
or anyone that has a difference in the vision between the eyes, watch after taking vision correction
measures.
- Watch at eye level with the 3D screen, directly in front of the screen.
- When you feel fatigued, dizzy or have a headache, stop watching and take a break.
-D
o not watch the 3D video when sleepy, tired or sick, and avoid watching the 3D video for a long
period of time.

Caution when using 3D Glasses

3D VIDEO

►3D glasses are sold separately. Refer to the 3D glasses manual for operating instructions.
►Do not use the 3D glasses to replace the corrective glasses, sunglasses or protective goggles.
►Do not store the 3D glasses in hot or cold location.
►Do not drop objects onto the 3D glasses. Do not drop or bend the glasses.
►Since the lenses of the 3D glasses are easily scratched, make sure to clean only with a soft cloth.
As the product may be scratched if there is any foreign material on the cloth, shake off any dust
before using it.

3D Video viewing range
TV size, viewing angle & other circumstances may change the viewing distance and the angle of view.

Viewing
Distance

2m-7m
(6.5 ft - 22.9 ft)
2m

Viewing
Angle

60 ◦ 60 ◦

120º (When the viewing distance is 2 m (6.5 ft))

3D VIDEO
WATCHING 3D VIDEO
1 Play the title produced in 3D video.

Refer to the following for 3D video input format supported.
Signal

Resolution

720p

1280x720

Horizontal
Vertical
Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz)

3D VIDEO

33.75

HDMI
Input

1080p

1920X1080

Top & Bottom, Side by Side

67.50

Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board
Single Frame Sequential

27.00

Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board
HDMI (V. 1.4 with HDMI 3D)
Frame Packing

33.75

Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Checker Board

33.75

Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Checker Board

1920X1080

1080p

USB
Input

Top & Bottom, Side by Side
HDMI (V. 1.4 with HDMI 3D)
Frame Packing

45.00

1080i

Playable 3D video format

Media contents and a player need to support HDMI (V. 1.4 with HDMI 3D) Frame Packing to play Frame Packing format stereoscopic.
Video, which is input as HDMI (V. 1.4 with HDMI 3D) Frame Packing format, is switched into the stereoscopic
screen automatically.

ENTER

After selecting the shape as shown in the screen on TV,
wear the 3D glasses.

To turn on 3D Mode, select this icon.

ꔁMove

ꔉEnter

Top & Bottom

ꕯ Exit

Side by Side

Checker Board

Frame Sequential

ENTER

L/R SELECT

Select Setting Left/Right.

Put on 3D glasses.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D
view.
(To select more comfortable view for
you, change to left/right image of glasses
with ꔅ button.)

ꔅ Setting Left/Right
3D

End 3D Video

ENTER

3D VIDEO

ꔉ Enter

Select Left/Right or Right/Left.
Select the screen with 3D video with better visibility.

ꔅ Setting Left/Right
ꔑ Left/Right
□ Right/Left
3D

End 3D Video
ꕯ Exit

Return to TV viewing.

! NOTE
► If you select 3D mode, "Power indicator" is turned off automatically.
► Specific menus may not work while watching the 3D video.
►
? You can only choose→Standard → Cinema → Game with the AV MODE button on remote control.
AV Mode is set as Standard while playing 3D video.
► Energy Saving is disabled while playing 3D video.
► 3D video does not work during external input lock, external input transition, editing Input Label,
MY MEDIA menu and SIMPLINK.

MY
MY MEDIA
MEDIA
ENTRY MODE
The My Media menu will open automatically when you insert a USB drive. My Media can also be
accessed by choosing My Media in the user menu.
After choosing the desired type of media, choose a device to open files from. The options are: USB
device, or DLNA.

Home Menu
Simple Manual

Pointer

Exit

Quick Menu

MY MEDIA

Channel List

Today
Today
Today
Today

30
30
30
30

Today

Netcast

SIMPLINK

NETCAST

INPUT

MY MEDIA

Screen Remote

GAME/SCHEDULE QUICK MENU

Please select the device.
USB Label

MY MEDIA

USB Label
DLNA

Movie List

Photo List

Music List

� Device Selection
ꔅ Search

1
2
3
4

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

ENTER

Select MY MEDIA.

ENTER

Select Movie List, Photo List or
Music List.

ENTER

Select the desired device.

BLUE

Search other network device.

ꔛ

This TV can view JPG image files, HD DivX
files and play MP3 audio files.

When removing the USB device
Select the USB Device menu before
removing the USB device.

1
2
3

� Previous

ENTER

Select Quick Menu.

ENTER

Select USB device.

ENTER

Select Eject.

CONNECTION METHOD
USB Connection

Memory Key

Precautions when using the USB device
►Only a USB storage device is recognizable.
►Connecting a USB storage device through a USB hub is not supported.
►A USB storage
AV IN 2 device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.
►The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.
►Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device
is working. When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB
storage device may be damaged.
►Only use a USB storage device which has normal music files, image files, or movie files.
►Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT 32 or NTFS file system provided with the Windows operating system. Others may not be recognized.
►Some USB storage devices require a power adapter. The power adapter must be connected in
order to be seen by the TV.
►If a device is not recognized by the TV, try a different cable. Excessively long cables are not supported.
►Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operate properly.
►Please backup important files because data on USB device could be damaged. Data management
is consumer's responsibility and as a result, the manufacturer does not cover data damage.
►If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can
use up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices.
►File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and file names can be up
to 100 English characters.
►The recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB
memory.
►If a USB external hard disk with a “Energy Saving” function doesn’t work, turn the hard disk off and
on again to make it work properly. Refer to the user manual of the USB external hard disk.
►USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the
movie list.
►Maximum of 999 folders or files can be recognized under one folder.
►If there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.

MY MEDIA

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R H/P

IN 4

USB IN 1

USB IN 2

1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN jack on the side of TV.

MY MEDIA
DLNA
About DLNA

MY MEDIA

This TV is a DLNA Certified digital media product.
It can display and play movie, photo and music content from your DLNA server.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics,
computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing
of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC running DLNA
server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this TV, some setting changes of
software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or
device for more information.

! NOTE
►The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM is a customized software edition only for
sharing files and folders to this TV.
►The
supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials software does not support following functions:
?
Transcoding, Remote UI, TV control, Internet services and Apple iTunes
►This manual explains operations with the English version of Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials as
examples. Follow the explanation referring to the actual operations of your language version.
►If there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
►For the DLNA option, use the Nero MediaHome programme that is provided with the TV. However, we
cannot guarantee that third party program will work perfectly.
►You can select a channel while viewing the small preview channel list on your TV screen.
►Check your network settings when the DLNA option does not work properly.
►If there is an abnormal operation or an error occurs in Nero Media Home, the DLNA option may
not work properly. In this case, exit Nero Media Home and restart the programme. You can download the latest version of Nero Media Home by clicking the question mark at the bottom-left of
the program.
►When the network is unstable, the device may be slower or may need to load during playback.
►When playing a video in DLNA mode, the Multi Audio and Closed Caption features are not supported.
►When selecting Full Screen in DLNA mode, the ratio of the outputted screen may differ from the
original.
►When more than one TV is connected to a single server in DLNA mode, a file may not play properly,
depending on the server performance.
►If the play time information is not provided by the server, it is displayed as "--:--:--."
►When using Movie List, DRM/*.tp/*.trp files in the DLNA server cannot be played.
►DLNA operation may not work properly according to the AP manufacturers.

Installing Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials is easy to use DLNA server software for Windows.

Start up your computer, and insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
An installation wizard will walk you through the quick and uncomplicated installation process.

Close all Microsoft Windows programs and exit any anti-virus software that may be running.

Insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.

Click Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials. The installation is prepared and the installation wizard appears.

Click the Next button to display the serial number input screen.
Click Next to go to the next step.

If you accept all conditions, click I accept the License Conditions check box and click Next.
Installation is not possible without this agreement.

Click Typical and click Next. The installation process is started.

If you want to take part in the anonymous collection of data, select the check box and click the
Next button.

Click the Exit button to complete the installation.

MY MEDIA

Requirement PC system before you install Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
ꔛ Windows® XP (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Vista® (no Service Pack required), Windows® XP
Media Center Edition 2005 (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Server® 2003
ꔛ Windows Vista® 64-bit edition (application runs in 32-bit mode)
ꔛ Hard drive space: 200 MB hard drive space for a typical installation of Nero MediaHome standalone
ꔛ 1.2 GHz Intel® Pentium® III or AMD Sempron™ 2200+ processors
ꔛ Memory: 256 MB RAM
ꔛ Graphics card with at least 32 MB video memory, minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels, and
16-bit color settings
ꔛ Windows® Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
ꔛ DirectX® 9.0c revision 30 (August 2006) or higher
ꔛ Network environment: 100 Mb Ethernet, WLAN (IEEE 802.11b/g/n)

MY MEDIA
Sharing files and folders
After installing Nero MediaHome, you must add folders you wish to share.

MY MEDIA

100

Double-click the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials icon on the desktop.

Click Network icon on the left and define your network name in the Network name field. The
Network name you enter will be recognized by your TV.

Click Shares icon on the left.

Click Local Folders tab on the Shared screen.

Click Add icon to open the Browse Folder window.

Select the folder containing the files you want to share. The selected folder is added to the list of
shared folders.

Click Start Server icon to start the server.

! NOTE

►If the shared folders or files are not displayed on the TV, click the folder on the Local Folders
tab and click Rescan Folder at the More button.
?
►Visit
www.nero.com for more information and software tools.

Playing back shared contents
You can display and play movie, photo and music content stored on your computer or other DLNA
media servers.

1 Start the server on your computer or other device that connected on your home network.
2
3

Select MY MEDIA.

ENTER

Select Movie List, Photo List or Music List.

ENTER

Select the DLNA.
Depending on the media server, this TV may need to get the permission from
the server.
If you want to re-scan available media server, press blue color button.

MY MEDIA

! NOTE
►To play the file on the media server, the TV and the media server must be connected to the
same access point.
?
►Because
the compatibility and available playback functions on the MY MEDIA menu are tested
on the bundle DLNA server (Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials) environment, file requirements and
playback functions on the MY MEDIA may differ depending on media servers.
►The file requirements on this page are not always compatible. There may have some restrictions
by file features and media server’s ability.
►Even the files that are not supported can be displayed in photo thumbnail or music thumbnail.
►Movie thumbnail is not supported in DLNA Movie.
►If there is an unplayable music file in the MY MEDIA menu, the TV will skip the file and play next
file.
►The file information indicated on the screen may not always correct for music and movie files in
MY MEDIA menu
►This TV only supports movie subtitle files supplied by Nero MediaHome 4.
►The subtitle file name and movie file name have to be the same and located at the same folder.
►If subtitle files have been added after a directory has been indexed already, the user has to
remove and re-add the folder to the list of shares.
►The playback and operating quality of the MY MEDIA function may be affected by your home
network condition.
►The files from removable media such as USB drive, DVD-drive etc. on your media server may
not share properly.
►When playing the Media through DLNA connection, it does not support the DivX file play which
is protected by DRM.
►Up to 200 folders in one folder and 999 including folders and files can be recognized.
►If there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.

101

MY MEDIA
MOVIE LIST
It displays all of the video files it recognizes.
The On-Screen Display on your model may be slightly different.
Supported movie file
ꔛ Resolution: under 1920 pixel (width) x 1080 pixel (height)
ꔛ Frame Rate: under 30 frame/sec (1920x1080), under 60 frame/sec (1280x720)
ꔛ Max bitrate of playable video file: 20 Mbps (Mega bit per second)
ꔛ Bit rate of audio format: within 32 kbps to 320 kbps (MP3)
ꔛ Supported external subtitle format: *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD,Subviewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.
txt(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivX)
ꔛ Supported Internal subtitle format: only XSUB (It is the subtitle format used in DivX6 files)

MY MEDIA

102

Precautions when playing the video files
►Some user-created subtitles may not work properly.
►Some special characters are not supported in subtitles.
►HTML tags are not supported in subtitles.
►Time information in an external subtitle file should be arranged in ascending order to be played.
►Changing font and color in subtitles is not supported.
►Subtitles in languages other than one specified are not supported.
►Video files with subtitle files of 1 MB or larger may not be played properly.
►The screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the
audio language is changed.
►A damaged video file may not be played correctly, or some functions may not be usable.
►Video files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly.
►If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, the file not playback properly.
►Video with resolution higher than maximum resolution supported for each frame, cannot be guaranteed for smooth playback.
►Video files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly.
►The movie file encoded by the GMC (Global Motion Compensation) and Qpel (Quarterpel Motion
Estimation) is not supported.
►Only 10000 sync blocks are supported within the subtitle file.
►We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264/AVC.
►DTS Audio codec is not supported.
►A video file more than 30GB in file size is not supported for playback.
►Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn’t support high speed may not work properly.
►USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the
movie list.
►The video file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder.
At this time, a video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed.
►When you are watching a movie via the Movie List function, you can adjust the picture with the
ENERGY SAVING and AV MODE button on the remote control. User setup for each picture mode
is not supported.
►Trick Mode does not support other functions than ꕙ if video files do not have index information.
►When playing video file using network, the Trick mode is limited to 2-times speed.
►Video file names that contain special characters may not be playable.

Supported Video Formats
File
Extensions

.asf
.wmv

Audio/
Video

Codec
VC-1 Advanced Profile

Advanced Profile@Level 3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)

VC-1 Simple and Main Profiles

Simple Profile@Medium Level (e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 1080p30)

Video

Audio

Profile/Level Support

Explanation
Only streams compliant
to SMPTE 421M VC-1
standard are supported.

WMA Standard
WMA 9 Professional
DivX3.11

Video
.divx
.avi

MY MEDIA

Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)

Global motion compensation or quarterpel
motion estimation does
not supported. Streams
using this syntax are not
supported.

MPEG-1 Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III (MP3)
Dolby Digital
H.264 / AVC

Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)

MPEG-4 Part 2

Advanced Simple Profile (e.g. 720p/1080i)

Audio

AAC

AAC-LC and HE-AAC

Global motion compensation or quarterpel
motion estimation does
not supported. Streams
using this syntax are not
supported.

Video

H.264 / AVC

Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)

Most of the MKV content available is encoded by the open source
x264 codec.

AAC

AAC-LC and HE-AAC

Video

.mkv
Audio

Dolby Digital
H.264 / AVC

Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)

MPEG-2

Main Profile@High Level(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)

VC-1

Simple Profile@Medium Level
(e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 1080p30)
Advanced Profile@Level3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)

Video
.ts
.trp
.tp

Audio

Video
.vob

Only streams compliant
to SMPTE 421M VC-1
standard are supported.

MPEG-1 Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III (MP3)
Dolby Digital
AAC

.mpg

Advanced Simple Profile
(e.g. 720p/1080i)

XViD
H.264 / AVC

Audio

.mp4
.m4v

DivX4
DivX5
DivX6

AAC-LC and HE-AAC

MPEG-1
MPEG-2

Audio

Dolby Digital
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
DVD-LPCM

Video

MPEG-1

Audio

MPEG-1 Layer I, II

Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)

Only streams compliant
configured properly for
TS, PS or ES

103

MY MEDIA
Screen Components
1
2
3

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

ENTER

Select MY MEDIA.

ENTER

Select Movie List.

MY MEDIA

1
1
2
3

5
6

8
9

Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Current page/ total pages of
contents
Contents under the folder
focused on 1
Change to a different input.
Move to Photo List or Music
List.
Changes the number or
thumbnails displayed at a time.
Allows you to mark certain files.
Return to TV viewing.

2
Page 1/1

Movie List
Drive1

USB 1 XTICK

Page 1/1

� Play

ꔅ To Photo List

ꔅ Change Numbers

Abnormal files are
displayed using this
graphic.
Non-supported files
are displayed using
this graphic.

104

Butterfly_...
01:34:33

ꔅ Change Device

ꔅ Mark Mode

� Page Change
ꕯ Exit

Movie Selection
Page 1/1

Movie List
Drive1

USB 1 XTICK

ENTER

Select the target folder
or drive.

ENTER

Select the desired
movie title.

Page 1/1

Butterfly_...
01:34:33

3
� Play
ꔅ To Photo List

ꔅ Change Numbers

Play the movie file.

� Page Change

ꔅ Mark Mode

ꕯ Exit

MY MEDIA

ꔅ Change Device

ENTER

Mark Mode
Page 1/1

Movie List

Mark Mode

Drive1

USB 1 XTICK

ENTER

Select the target folder
or drive.

ENTER

Select Mark Mode.

ENTER

Select the desired
movie title.

ENTER

Page 1/1

Butterfly_...
01:34:33

� Play
ꔅ Play Marked

ꔅ Mark All

ꔅ Unmark All

ꔅ Exit Mark Mode

� Page Change
ꕯ Exit

Play
Marked

Play the first selected file. Once a movie
finishes playing, the next selected one will
be played automatically.

Mark All

Mark all files in the folder.

Unmark
All

Deselect all marked files.

Exit Mark
Mode

Enter or exit the Mark Mode.

ꔛ

Select Play Marked.
Play the marked movie
file.
It displays the current
movie status progress
bar on the bottom of
the screen.

When one or more movie files are
marked, the marked movies will be
played in sequence.

105

MY MEDIA
Playing the Movie
1

�

� Option

� Hide

ꕯ Exit

4
3

� Stop playback.
� Return to normal playback.
� Paused playback. If no buttons
are pressed on the remote control
for 10 minutes after pausing, the
TV returns to the playback state.
� � Select the required speed:
x2, x4, x8, x16, x32 (backward/forward).
Increase or decrease the brightness of your screen.
Hide the menu on screen. To see
the menu again, press ENTER
button.
Return to the previous menu.

Choose options.
Set Video Play.
Set Video.
Set Audio.
� Previous

1
2

106

ENTER

Show the Option menu.
Select the desired menu option.

! NOTE
► When replaying a video file after stopping, you can play from where it stopped
? automatically.
► If you select “Yes” when playing the
same file after the video file has been
stopped, it will restart where it stopped
previously.
► If continuous series files exist within the
folder, the next file will automatically be
played. But, this excludes cases when
the Repeat function of Movie List Option
is turned “On” (Refer to page 107) or
when set as Marked Play.

Set Video Play Menu Options
Set Video Play.

◀

Full

▶

Audio Language

◀

▶

Subtitle Language

◀

▶

• Language

◀

English

▶

• Code Page

◀

Default

▶

• Sync

◀

▶

• Position

◀

▶

• Size

◀

Normal

▶

Repeat

◀

Off

▶

� Previous

ꔛ

Close
ꔛ

1
2

ENTER

Select the desired menu option.

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.

ꔛ

Code Page

ꔛ

Subtitle Language Group

Supported Language

Latin1

English, Spanish, French

Korean

English, Korean

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

Picture Size: Selects your desired
picture format for videos.
Full Mode: Files are played in full
screen mode regardless of the aspect
ratio of video.
Original Mode: Files are played
according to the aspect ratio of
video.
Audio Language: Changes the
Language Group of the audio for
video files. Files with a single audio
track cannot be selected.
Subtitle Language: The subtitles can
be turned on or off.
Language: Activated for SMI subtitles
and can select the language within
the subtitle.
Code Page: Subtitle font selection.
When set to default, contents are
displayed in the language set in
"Option - Language - Menu
Language."
Sync: When the video is not synchronized with the captions, it can be
adjusted by 0.5 second.
Position: Move the location of the
subtitles.
Size: Changes the subtitle font size.
Repeat: Turn on/off repeat function
of movie playback. When turned on,
the file within the folder will be played
back repeatedly. When turned off, if
the next file name is similar to the
previous file, it can be played sequentially.

MY MEDIA

Picture Size

107

MY MEDIA
* Image shown may differ from your TV.

Set Video Menu Options
For LED LCD TV

For Plasma TV

Set Video.

◀

Picture Mode

Standard

▶

Picture Mode

• Backlight

◀

▶

• Contrast

100

◀

▶

100

◀

▶

• Brightness

◀

▶

◀

▶

• Sharpness

◀

▶

• Color

◀

▶

• Color

◀

◀ R

▶

◀ W

▶

• Edge Enhancer

◀

High

▶

• Tint

• Noise Reduction

◀

Medium

▶

• Color Temp.

MY MEDIA

• Noise Reduction

◀

▶

Low

▼
� Previous

Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Close.

ENTER

Set Audio Menu Options
Set Audio.
Sound Mode

◀

Standard

▶

Auto Volume

◀

Off

▶

Clear Voice II

◀

Off

▶

0 ◀ L

Balance
� Previous

▶

Standard

• Brightness

Picture Reset

108

◀

ENTER

▶

Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Close.

� Previous

▶

PHOTO LIST
The On-Screen Display on your model may be slightly different.
Supported photo file: *.JPG
ꔛ Baseline: 64 pixel (width) x 64 pixel (height) to 15360 pixel (width) x 8640 pixel (height)
ꔛ Progressive: 64 pixel (width) x 64 pixel (height) to 1920 pixel (width) x 1440 pixel (height)
ꔛ You can play JPEG files only.
ꔛ Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.
ꔛ An error message occurs for corrupted files or file formats that cannot be played.
ꔛ Corrupted image files may not be displayed properly.
ꔛ It may take some time to view high-resolution images in full screen.
For 47/55LX9500
File
Extensions

photo size
supproted file format

mpo

photo size

Profile
SOF0: baseline
SOF1: Extend Sequential
SOF2: Progressive
Min: 64 x 64
Max - Normal Type: 15360 (W) x 8640 (H)
Progressive Type: 1920 (W) x 1440 (H)
mpo
4:3 size: 3648 x 2736
2592 x 1944
2048 x 1536
3:2 size: 3648 x 2432

MY MEDIA

supproted file format

jpeg
jpg
jpe

Item

Screen Components
1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

ENTER

Select Home Menu.

2
Page 1/1

Photo List
ENTER

Select MY MEDIA.

ENTER

Select Photo List.

Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Current page/total pages of
contents
Contents under the folder
focused on 1
Change to a different input.
Move to Music List or Movie
List.
Changes the number or
thumbnails displayed at a time.
Allows you to mark certain files.
Return to TV viewing.

USB 1 XTICK

Drive1

Page 1/1

� View
ꔅ Change Device

ꔅ To Music List

ꔅ Change Numbers

ꔅ Mark Mode

� Page Change
ꕯ Exit

Abnormal files are
displayed using this
graphic.
Non-supported files
are displayed using
this graphic.

109

MY MEDIA
Photo Selection
Page 1/1

Photo List
USB 1 XTICK

Drive1

ENTER

Select the target folder
or drive.

ENTER

Select the desired photos.

Page 1/1

3
� View

MY MEDIA

ꔅ Change Device

ꔅ To Music List

ꔅ Change Numbers

ꔅ Mark Mode

ENTER

Photo file is displayed.

� Page Change
ꕯ Exit

Mark Mode
Page 1/1

Photo List
Mark Mode

Drive1

USB 1 XTICK

� View
ꔅ View Marked

110

ꔅ Mark All

ꔅ Unmark All

ENTER

Select the target folder
or drive.

ENTER

Select Mark Mode.

ENTER

Select the desired
photo files.

ENTER

Page 1/1

ꔅ Exit Mark Mode

� Page Change
ꕯ Exit

ꔛ

View
Marked

Display the selected photo.

Mark All

Mark all photos on the screen.

Unmark
All

Deselect all marked photos.

Exit Mark
Mode

Enter or exit the Mark Mode.

Select View Marked.
View the marked photo
files.

When one or more photos are
marked, you can view individual photos or a slide show of the marked
photos. If no photos are marked, you
can view all photos individually or all
photos in the folder in a slide show.

Full Screen Menu
More operations are available in full screen mode.
Page 1/1

Photo List
USB 1 XTICK

Drive1

Page 1/1

� View
ꔅ To Music List

ꔅ Change Numbers

� Page Change

ꔅ Mark Mode

MY MEDIA

ꔅ Change Device

ꕯ Exit

01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB

◀

▶

◀
Slideshow �

1
2
3

BGM �

�

2/13
ꕲ

�

The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size
of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.

▶
� Option

� Hide

ꕯ Exit

Select the target folder or drive.
ENTER

ENTER

Select the desired photos.
The selected photo is displayed in full
size.

111

MY MEDIA

01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB

ENTER

Select the Slideshow,
◀

▶

MY MEDIA

Slideshow �

BGM �

�

◀

2/13

ꕲ

�

BGM, � (Rotate), ꕲ / ꕳ, �
(Energy Saving), Option, or Hide.

▶
� Option

� Hide

ꕯ Exit

► Slideshow: Selected photos are displayed during the slide show. If no photo is selected, all photos
in the current folder are displayed during slide show.
ꔛ Set

the time interval of the slide show in Option-Set Photo View. menu (Refer to p. 113).
ꔛ You

can adjust Option by using the Q.MENU button on the remote control.
► BGM (Background Music): Listen to music while viewing photos in full size.
ꔛ Set the BGM device and album in Option-Set Photo View. menu (Refer to p. 113).
ꔛ You can adjust Option by using the Q.MENU button on the remote control.
► � (Rotate): Rotate photos.
ꔛ Rotates the photo 90 °, 180 °, 270 °, 360 ° clockwise.
ꔛ Photos

cannot be rotated if its width is greater than the available supported resolution height.
► ꕲ / ꕳ : View the photo in full mode or original mode.
► � (Energy Saving): Increase the brightness of your screen by using ENERGY SAVING button.
► Option: Set values for Slide Speed and BGM (Refer to p.113).
ꔛ You cannot change BGM while BGM is playing.
ꔛ You can only select the MP3 folder saved on the device that currently displays the photo.
► Hide: Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
ꔛ To

see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press ENTER button to display.
► Exit: Move to the previous menu screen.

112

Using the Photo List Function
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB

Choose options.
Set Photo View.

◀

▶

Set Video.
Set Audio.
� Previous

Slideshow �

1
2

BGM �

�

2/13
ꕲ

�

▶
� Option

ENTER

Show the Option menu.

ENTER

Select the desired menu option.

� Hide

ꕯ Exit

MY MEDIA

◀

Set Photo View Menu Options
Set Photo View.

◀

Slide Speed
BGM

▶

Drive1

• Repeat

◀

▶

• Random

◀

Off

▶

� Previous

Fast

ENTER

Select Slide Speed or BGM.

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.

113

MY MEDIA

* Image shown may differ from your TV.

Set Video Menu Options
For LED LCD TV

For Plasma TV

Set Video.

◀

Picture Mode

Standard

▶

Picture Mode

◀

▶

• Contrast

100

◀

▶

• Contrast

100

◀

▶

• Brightness

◀

▶

• Brightness

◀

▶

• Sharpness

◀

▶

• Color

◀

▶

• Color

◀

▶

MY MEDIA

• Edge Enhancer

◀

High

▶

• Tint

◀ R

▶

• Noise Reduction

◀

Medium

▶

• Color Temp.

◀ W

▶

• Noise Reduction

Picture Reset

◀

Low

▼

Set Audio.
Sound Mode

◀

Standard

▶

Auto Volume

◀

Off

▶

Clear Voice II

◀

Off

▶

0 ◀ L

Balance
� Previous

ENTER

� Previous

Make appropriate adjustments. Then, select Close.

ENTER

Set Audio Menu Options

▶

Standard

• Backlight

� Previous

114

◀

▶

Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Close.

▶

MUSIC LIST
This TV cannot play back copy-protected files.
The On-Screen Display on your model may be slightly different.
Supported Music File: *.MP3
Bit rate range: 32 Kbps - 320 Kbps
• Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz

Screen Components

2
3

ENTER

MY MEDIA

Select Home Menu.

ENTER

Select MY MEDIA.

ENTER

Select Music List.

Page 1/1

Music List
Drive1

USB 1 XTICK

2
3
4

6
7

9
10

Preview: If any album jacket for
the file (Album Art Image)
exists, this picture is displayed.
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Current page/total pages of
contents
Contents under the folder
focused on 2
Change to a different input.
Move to Movie List or Photo
List.
Changes the number or
thumbnails displayed at a time.
Allows you to mark certain files.
Return to TV viewing.

001. - B01 .mp3
00:00

002. -B02.mp3
00:00

Page 1/1

003. B03.mp3
00:00

004. - B04.mp3
00:00

005. - B05.mp3
00:00

� Play
ꔅ Change Device

ꔅ To Movie List

ꔅ Change Numbers

ꔅ Mark Mode

� Page Change
ꕯ Exit

Abnormal files are
displayed using this
graphic.
Non-supported files
are displayed using
this graphic.

115

MY MEDIA
Music Selection
Page 1/1

Music List
Drive1

USB 1 XTICK

001. - B01.mp3
00:00

002. - B02.mp3
00:00

003. - B03.mp3
00:00

004. - B04.mp3
00:00

005. - B05.mp3
00:00

ENTER

Select the target folder
or drive.

ENTER

Select the desired
music file.

3
� Play

ꔅ Change Device

1
Page 1/1

ꔅ To Movie List

ꔅ Change Numbers

ꔅ Mark Mode

ENTER

Music files are played.

� Page Change
ꕯ Exit

MY MEDIA

Mark Mode
Page 1/1

Music List

Mark Mode

Drive1

USB 1 XTICK

001. - B01.mp3
00:00

002. - B02.mp3
00:00

003. - B03.mp3
00:00

004. - B04.mp3
00:00

� Play

116

ꔅ Mark All

ꔅ Unmark All

ENTER

Select the target folder
or drive.

ENTER

Select Mark Mode.

ENTER

Select the desired
music file.

ENTER

Page 1/1

005. - B05.mp3
00:00

ꔅ Play Marked

ꔅ Exit Mark Mode

� Page Change
ꕯ Exit

Play
Marked

Play the selected songs. Once a song
finishes playing, the next selected one
will be played automatically.

Mark All

Mark all songs in the folder.

Unmark
All

Deselect all marked song.

Exit Mark
Mode

Enter or exit the Mark Mode.

Select Play Marked.
Play the marked music
file.

Using the Music List Function
Page 1/1

Music List

3 file(s) Marked

Drive1

Page 1/1

�
�
001. - B01.mp3
00:00

�

003. - B03.mp3
00:00

�

� Play with Photo

005. - B05.mp3
00:00

02:30 / 03:25

�

� Option

� Hide

ꕯ Exit

4
5

MY MEDIA

�

004. - B04.mp3
00:00

��

�

002. - B02.mp3

�

002. - B02.mp3
00:00

� Stop playback.
� Return to normal playback.
� Paused playback.
� � Select the previous or next
song.
Play with Photo: Start playing the
selected songs and then move to
the Photo List.
Increase or decrease the brightness of your screen
Hide the menu on screen.
Move to the previous menu
screen.

Choose options.
Set Audio Play.
Set Audio.
� Previous

1
2

ENTER

Show the Option menu.
Select Set Audio Play. or Set Audio..

! NOTE
► You can listen to the music only within
the device currently played.

117

MY MEDIA

Set Audio Play Menu Options
Set Audio Play.
Repeat

◀

▶

Random

◀

Off

▶

� Previous

MY MEDIA

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Close.

Set Audio Menu Options
Set Audio.
Sound Mode

◀

Standard

▶

Auto Volume

◀

Off

▶

Clear Voice II

◀

Off

▶

0 ◀ L

Balance
� Previous

118

ENTER

▶

Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Close.

ꔛ

If you don't press any buttons for a while, the play information box
will float across the screen. This prevents screen pixel damage due
to a fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of
time.
002. B02.mp3
� 00:31 / 04:04

! NOTE

► A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime.
► Music files with copy-protection will not play.
? Press ENTER or � button to stop the screen saver.
►

MY MEDIA

119

MY MEDIA
DIVX REGISTRATION CODE
Using the registration number, movies can be rented or purchased at www.divx.com/vod.
Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.

DivX Reg.Code

MY MEDIA

Deactivation
Movie List

MY MEDIA

1
2
3
4

120

Music List

� Previous

You must register your device to
play DivX protected videos.
Registration code : xxxxxxxxxx
Register at http://vod.divx.com

Select MY MEDIA.

ENTER

Photo List

BLUE

Select DivX Option.

Select DivX Reg. Code.

ENTER

Display Divx Reg. Code.

! NOTE
► When loading, some buttons may not work.
► If you use the DivX registration code of another device, the rented or purchased DivX file cannot
? be played. Therefore always use the DivX registration code assigned to this product.
► The video or audio of a file converted based on a standard other than the DivX codec standard
may be corrupted or unable to be played.
► The DRM/*.tp/*.trp file in DLNA server is not played when Movie List is in operation.

DEACTIVATION
The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the
available devices through the web server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD
allows the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account.
Delete the existing authentication information to receive a new DivX user authentication for TV. Once
this function is executed, a DivX user authentication is required again to see DivX DRM files.

DivX Reg.Code

MY MEDIA

Deactivation

1
2
3
4
5

Music List

� Previous

Yes

Select MY MEDIA.

ENTER

Photo List

Deregistration code:
********
Deregister at http://vod.divx.com
Continue with registration?

MY MEDIA

Movie List

BLUE

Select DivX Option.

Select Deactivation.

ENTER

Select Yes.
Display Deactivation.

121

NETWORK
NETWORK
LEGAL NOTICE
Legal Notice
NETWORK

ꔂ Move

• Network Setting

: Wired

• Network Status

: Internet is connected

• Legal Notice

page 1/3

ꔉ Enter

ꔉ
ꔀ

• ESN

IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICE All content and services
accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent,
trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided
solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a
manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without
limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service
provider, you may not copy, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create
derivative works, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed
through this device.YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND
ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER
EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

ꔍ
Close

NETWORK

1
2

Select NETWORK.

ENTER

Select Legal Notice.

ENTER

4
EXIT

Check Legal notice.
Return to TV viewing.

IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICE
All content and services accessible through this device belong
to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark
and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use.
You may not use any content or services in a manner that has
not been authorized by the content owner or service provider.
Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by
the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not
copy, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create derivative works, or distribute in any manner or medium any content
or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE
DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH
RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER
EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. LG DOES
NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS,
LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR
SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL
MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE

122

DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERRORFREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE, SHALL LG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT
OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR
ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY
THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed,
terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any
time, without notice, and LG makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any
period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third
parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over
which LG has no control. LG may impose limits on the use of or
access to certain services or content, in any case and without
notice or liability. LG expressly disclaims any responsibility or
liability for any change, interruption, disabling, removal of or
suspension of any content or service made available through
this device.
LG is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related
to the content and services. Any question or request for service
relating to the content or services should be made directly to the
respective content and service providers.

NETCAST

NETCAST MENU
These services are provided by separate Content Provider.
NETCAST menu source can differ by country.

What is a NETCAST?
Stream movies, TV shows and video, or get up to the minute news, stock information or weather updates
directly to your TV.
Home Menu
Quick Menu
Channel List
Netcast
Screen Remote

ENTER

ꔛ

Select NetCast.

ꔛ

Select NETCAST menu option.
Enjoy Online Service.

Yahoo! (For USA)
Yahoo! TV Widgets give you the best of the
Internet in perfect harmony with the simplicity
and reliability of your TV. TV Widgets deliver a
Cinematic internetTM experience by converting
your favorite web services for viewing on the TV.
ꔛ Netflix (For USA)
You can instantly watch movies (quite a few new
releases) & TV episodes from Netflix streamed
over the internet to your TV.
To become a Netflix member visit: www.netflix.
com/LG
Note that this service is provided by the Content
Provider, Netflix. It is dependent on Netflix to provide the data.
ꔛ Vudu (For USA)
In order to make rental/purchase transactions on
the Vudu service, a user must create an account
on vudu.com.
That account is linked to a specific device, via a
process called “activation”. It is possible to have
multiple devices associated with a single Vudu
account.
Note that this service is provided by the Content
Provider, Vudu. It is dependent on Vudu to provide the data.
ꔛ YouTube
YouTube is a video sharing website where users
can upload, view, and share video clips.

ꔛ

To view the owner’s manual that provided by
the Content Provider, visit our website at
http://www.lg.com.
To see the activation method of Yahoo!,
Netflix, or Vudu, click the Yahoo!, Netflix,
Vudu in the CD manual (For USA).
You can also select the NETCAST using the
NETCAST button on the TV remote control.

NETCAST

ENTER

Picasa
Picasa is an application from Google that appreciates digital image files.

ꔛ

! NOTE
► The videos list searched from the TV may
different with the list searched from a web
browser on PC.
? The settings of this TV do not affect the
►
YouTube’s playback quality.
► The playback of videos may be paused,
stopped or buffering occurring often
depending on your broadband speed.
► For service that requires log in, join the
applicable service on the website using the
PC and log in through the TV to enjoy
various additional functionalities.
► When you set the city you want with Setup
by pressing the red button, the background
of NetCast will be set to the weather of the
selected city.
► For Plasma TV: If there is no user action 2
minutes following freezing image or video
on screen, the screensaver will activate
itself preventing fixed image remaining on
screen.

123

NETCAST
YOUTUBE
YouTube is a video sharing website where users can upload, view, and share video clips.

Screen Components
1
2

YouTube menu
Videos list

RED

Set the option menu.

NETCAST

Return to Netcast menu.
EXIT

Return to TV viewing.

NOTE
► When you press the Q.menu button while the Youtube video is playing in full mode, you can set
the video options.

124

YouTube menu
Home: You can watch the popular video in real time.
Featured: The featured videos list will be displayed.
Popular: The best rated videos list from YouTube server will be displayed.
Most Viewed: The most viewed videos list will be displayed.
Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
History: The videos list that you previously played will be displayed. Maximum of 20 videos can be stored.
Favorites: In sign-in status, this menu will be displayed the videos list that is arranged in the YouTube
server with your account (Some videos may not appear on the Favorites list, even if the videos are
arranged in the server).
Sign in (Sign Out): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.

Stops the video and displays related videos list.

NETCAST

Using the remote control

Pause the video while it is playing.
Play the selected video.
Skip the playback forward or backward.
RED

Set the option menu.
Return to Netcast menu.

EXIT

Return to TV viewing.

125

NETCAST
PICASA
Picasa is a photo organizing or sharing website where users can upload, view, and share photos.

Screen Components
1
1
2

Picasa menu
Photo list

NETCAST

Navigate the desired photos.
ENTER

The selected photo file is displayed.
Return to Netcast menu.

EXIT

126

Return to TV viewing.

Picasa menu
Home: The featured photos list will be displayed.
Friends: You can register users with the pictures you want as friends. You can add up to 10 friends.
Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
My Photos: You can view the pictures uploaded to the Web. This function can only be used when you sign
in.
Sign in (Sign Out): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.

NETCAST

127

PICTURE
PICTURE CONTROL
CONTROL
PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL
This feature lets you choose the way an analog picture with a 4:3 aspect ratio is displayed on your TV.
You can select a different aspect ratio depending on input source (analog broadcasting, digital broadcasting, aux).

PICTURE
• Aspect Ratio

� Move

� Enter

: 16:9

ꔉ

ꔡ

• Picture Wizard
• ꕊ Energy Saving : Off

PICTURE

ꔂ Move

• Aspect Ratio

ꔉ Enter

: 16:9

• Picture Wizard
• ꕊ Energy Saving : Off

• Picture Mode

: Standard

• Picture Mode

: Standard

• Backlight

• Contrast

100

• Contrast

100

• Brightness

• Sharpness

ꔑ 16:9
□ Just Scan

ꔉ

ꔡ

□ Set By Program
□ 4:3
□ Zoom
□ Cinema Zoom 1

1
2
PICTURE CONTROL

Select PICTURE.

ꔛ

ꔛ
ENTER

Select Aspect Ratio.

ENTER

Select the desired picture format.

4
BACK

EXIT

You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in
the Q.MENU.
Press the RATIO button repeatedly to
select the desired picture format.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

When adjusting Zoom or Cinema Zoom in Q.MENU
1
2
3
4

128

Q.MENU

Select Aspect Ratio.

ENTER

Select Zoom or Cinema
Zoom.

ENTER

Adjust proportion of Zoom or
Cinema Zoom. The Cinema
Zoom adjustment range is
1-16.

ENTER

Move the image on the screen.

16:9

4:3

Adjust the picture horizontally, in a linear
proportion to fill the entire screen.

Choose 4:3 when you want to view a picture
with an original 4:3 aspect ratio.

Just Scan

Zoom

Normally the edges of video signals are
cropped 1-2%. Just Scan turns off this
cropping and shows the complete video.
Notes: If there is noise on the edges of the
original signal, it will be visible when Just Scan
is activated.
Just Scan operates only in DTV/Cable DTV/
C o m p o n e n t / H D M I - DT V/ D V I - DT V
(720p/1080i/1080p) input source.

Choose Zoom when you want to view the
picture without any alteration. However, the
top and bottom portions of the picture will
be cropped.

Cinema Zoom

Set By Program
Selects the proper picture proportion to
match the source’s image.
(4:3

Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to
enlarge the picture in correct proportion.
This enlarges an image with cinemascope
aspect ratio (2.35:1) without distortion.
Note: When enlarging or reducing the picture, the image may become distorted.

PICTURE CONTROL

Just Scan

4:3)

Set By Program
(16:9

16:9)

Set By Program
129

PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE WIZARD
This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image. Use this to calibrate the screen
quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. You can calibrate the screen quality by easily following each step. When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the example of
the changes you made.
PICTURE
• Aspect Ratio

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

Black Level
Set the screen above identical to the Recommended sample
below.

: 16:9
ꔉ
ꔀ

• Picture Wizard
• ꕊ Energy Saving : Off

1
2

• Picture Mode

: Standard

• Backlight

• Contrast

100

• Brightness

• Sharpness

Low

Recommended

• Brightness

High

50 ◀

▶

ꕉ Previous

Select PICTURE.

ENTER

ꔉ Next

ENTER

Adjust Black Level.

Select Picture
Wizard.
White Level

Picture Wizard
With Picture Wizard, you can adjust the picture quality of the
original image.

Set the screen above identical to the Recommended sample
below.

PICTURE CONTROL

ꕖ

ꕉ Previous

ENTER

ꔉ Next

Adjust Picture Wizard.

Picture Wizard

Low

Recommended

• Contrast

90 ◀

High
▶

ꕉ Previous

ꔉ Next

ENTER

Adjust White Level.

Tint
Set the screen above identical to the Recommended sample
below.

Standard
• Standard/Preferred

Preferred
Low

◀ Standard ▶

Recommended

• Tint
ꕉ Previous

4
ꔛ

130

◀

High
R

▶

ꔉ Next
ꕉ Previous
ENTER

Adjust Standard/
Preferred.

If you select Preferred, OSD (On Screen
Display) differ from that shown in this manual.

ꔉ Next

ENTER

Adjust Tint.

For LED LCD TV
Backlight

Color
Set the screen above identical to the Recommended sample
below.

Low

Recommended

• Color

50 ◀

ꕉ Previous

Set the Backlight to your Brightness preference.

Dark

High

• Backlight

▶

ꔉ Next

Recommended
30 ◀

ENTER

▶

ꕉ Previous

ꔉ Next

Bright

Adjust Color.

ENTER

Adjust Backlight.

i.e)
Complete

Horizontal Sharpness
Set the screen above identical to the Recommended sample
below.

� Move

ꘁ Mark

Select (an) input(s) to apply the settings.
ꔑ DTV
□ TV
□ AV1
□ AV2

Low

Recommended

• H Sharpness

50 ◀

ꕉ Previous

□ Component1

High

□ Component2

▶

□ RGB-PC
ꔑ HDMI1

ꔉ Next

ꔑ HDMI2

ENTER

Adjust Horizontal
Sharpness.

ꔑ HDMI4
Warning: The picture quality may vary according to the different types of
signal and inputs.

ꕉ Previous

Vertical Sharpness
Set the screen above identical to the Recommended sample
below.

Low

Recommended

• V Sharpness

50 ◀

ꕉ Previous

High

ENTER

MARK

FAV

CHAR/NUM

Adjust Vertical
Sharpness.

Select input source to
apply the settings.

i
ENTER

▶

ꔉ Next

ꔉ Confirm

Save.

PICTURE CONTROL

ꔑ HDMI3

The current adjustment value is
saved to Expert1.
Close

14
ꔛ

ꔛ

ENTER

Finish the Picture Wizard.

If you stop the Picture Wizard before the
final step, the changes will not be saved to
the TV.
Once the Picture Wizard sets the picture
quality, Energy Saving is changed to Off
automatically.
To reset changes made by Picture Wizard,
operate Picture Reset when Picture Mode
is on Expert1.

131

PICTURE CONTROL
ꕊ ENERGY SAVING
It reduces the TV’s power consumption.
The default factory setting is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home.
You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the Energy Saving level or by adjusting the
Picture Mode.
Press button to run the selected
function.

Home Menu

Screen Remote

Quick Menu

ENERGY
Energy
Saving
SAVING

AV MODE

INPUT

FAV

Q.MENU

SIMPLINK

Channel List
Netcast
Screen Remote

PICTURE CONTROL

1
2
3

ENTER

Select Screen Remote.

ENTER

Select ENERGY SAVING.

ENTER

Select ENERGY SAVING repeatedly
to select your desired menu option.

Enter

LIST

FLASHBK

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

132

When selecting Screen off, the
screen will turn off after 3 seconds.
Pressing any button of the remote
controller will turn on the screen
again.
If you adjust “Energy Saving-Auto,
Maximum”, Backlight option will not
work (For LED LCD TV).
When selecting “Energy Saving Off, Minimum, or Medium, you can
adjust Backlight feature (For LED
LCD TV).
If you adjust “Energy SavingIntelligent Sensor”, Sharpness, Color,
Color Temperature feature will not
work (For Plasma TV).
When selecting Auto, Backlight is
automatically adjusted through
Intelligent Sensor according to the
surrounding conditions. (For LED
LCD TV)
When selecting Off, Energy Saving is
not used.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button
repeatedly to select the appropriate
Energy Saving.
You can also adjust Energy Saving in
the PICTURE menu.
Intelligent Sensor: The most suitable
picture is automatically adjusted
according to the surrounding conditions (For Plasma TV).

PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS (PICTURE MODE)
There are factory presets for picture settings available in the user menus. You can use a preset,
change each setting manually, or use the Intelligent Sensor.
PICTURE
• Aspect Ratio

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

: 16:9

• Picture Wizard

□ Intelligent Sensor

• ꕊ Energy Saving : Off

□ Vivid

• Picture Mode

: Standard

ꔑ Standard

• Backlight

• Contrast

100

• Brightness

• Sharpness

□ Vivid
ꔑ Standard
ꔉ
ꔉꔀ
ꔀ

□ ꔧ Cinema

□ ꔧ Bright Room

□ Sport

□ Game

□ ꕋExpert1

□ ꕋExpert2

Other models

1
2
3

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

Select PICTURE.

ENTER

Select Picture Mode.

ENTER

Select your desired menu option.

Vivid, Standard, Cinema, Sport, and Game
Settings are preset for the optimum picture
quality at the factory.
Vivid: This is the mode to maximize the effect
of the video in the retail store. Strengthen the
contrast, brightness, color and sharpness for
vivid picture.
Standard: This is the mode to realize optimum
viewing condition for the general user.
ꕭ (Auto Power Saving): This is the mode to
maximize reducing the power consumption
without hurting the picture quality. This features is available only on Plasma TV.
Cinema: This mode optimizes video for watching movies.
ꔧ Cinema: This is cinema quality mode to
provide you the experience of watching a movie
at home. The user will be able enjoy the best
level of satisfactory screen quality in any movie
without any separate adjustments. ꔧ Cinema
express the optimal screen quality when it is
darkest.
When selecting ꔧ Cinema, Aspect ratio
changes to Just scan.

4
BACK

EXIT

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

Plasma TV

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔧ Bright Room: This is the specification to
optimize TV viewing in Bright Room.
When selecting ꔧ Bright Room, Aspect ratio
changes to Just scan.
Sport: This is the video mode to emphasize
dynamic video and primary color (e.g, white,
uniform, grass, sky blue etc.) by realizing the
optimal screen for sports.
Game: This is the mode to realize fast response
speed in a fast gaming screen.
Expert: This is the mode to adjust the video in
detail for video quality expert and general user.
You can also adjust Picture Mode in the
Q.MENU.
When selecting Intelligent Sensor, Energy
Saving is changed to Auto automatically (For
LED LCD TV).
When selecting Intelligent Sensor, it changes
Backlight, contrast, brightness, sharpness, color,
tint and color temperature automatically (For
LED LCD TV).
Intelligent Sensor: The most suitable picture is
automatically adjusted according to the surrounding conditions.

PICTURE CONTROL

ꔛ

ꔉ
ꔀ

□ꕭ

133

PICTURE CONTROL
MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT - USER MODE
Adjust the picture appearance to suit your preference and viewing situations.

PICTURE
• Aspect Ratio

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

: 16:9
ꔠ

• Picture Wizard

1
2
3
PICTURE CONTROL

4
5

ꔡ

• Picture Mode

: Standard

• Backlight

• Contrast

100

• Brightness

• Sharpness

ꔉ
ꔀ

Select PICTURE.

ENTER

Select Picture Mode.

ENTER

Select your desired menu option.

ENTER

Select Backlight (For LED LCD TV),
Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Color,
Tint, Color Temp., or Advanced Control.

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.

6
BACK

ꔛ

Return to the previous menu.
ꔛ

EXIT

Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

134

70 ◀

• Backlight

• ꕊ Energy Saving : Off

▶
ꔉ Enter

Backlight (For LED LCD TV): This
function adjusts the brightness of the
backlight behind the LCD screen.
Adjusting the backlight is recommended when setting the brightness
of the TV. When decreasing the
backlight, the brightness of the black
becomes darker without any loss in
video signal and the power consumption is reduced.
Backlight can only be adjusted in "
Energy Saving - Off, Minimum, or
Medium".
Contrast: Increase or decrease the
gradient of the video signal. You may
use Contrast when the bright part of
the picture is saturated.
Brightness: Adjusts the base level of
the signal in the picture. You may use
Brightness when the dark part of the
picture is saturated.
Sharpness: Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light
and dark areas of the picture. The
lower the level, the softer the image.
Color: Adjusts intensity of all colors.
Tint: Adjusts the balance between
red and green levels.
Color Temp.: Set to warm to enhance
hotter colors such as red, or set to
cool to enhance cooler colors such
as blue.

PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY
(ADVANCED CONTROL)
Advanced Control allows you to adjust some of the advanced features of your LG display.
To reset to the factory default after making adjustments to each input source, execute the Picture
Reset function for each Picture Mode.

PICTURE

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

PICTURE

ꔂ Move

• Color

• Tint

• Color Temp.

• Advanced Control

ꔉ
ꔀ

• Tint
0 R
Dynamic Contrast
• Color Temp. 0 W
Dynamic Color
• Advanced Control

• Picture Reset

Clear
White
• Picture
Reset

• TruMotion

: Low

• TruMotion

: Low
Skin
Color

• Screen (RGB-PC)

• LED Local Dimming : On

• Color

ꔉ Enter

60
◀

Low
C

Gamma

Dynamic Contrast
Dynamic Color

Off

Noise Reduction

Noise Reduction
• LED Local Dimming : On
Digital Noise Reduction

▶

Off

Black Level

Off

Film Mode

Off

Low
Off

Color Gamut

Wide

Low

ꔍ

Eye Care

Low

ꔍ

▶

Medium

Black Level

Low
Off

Gamma

Off

Medium

◀

Plasma TV

LED LCD TV

2
3

Select PICTURE.

ENTER

Select Advanced Control.

ENTER

Select your desired menu option.

PICTURE CONTROL

Make appropriate adjustments.

5
BACK

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

135

PICTURE CONTROL
EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL
� Expert1 and � Expert2 provide even more advanced picture settings for users. Typical used by

professionals for calibrating the TV.

PICTURE
• Aspect Ratio

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

: 16:9

PICTURE

• ꕊ Energy Saving : Off

• V Sharpness 70
Dynamic Contrast
◀
• Color
70
Noise Reduction
• Tint
70

• Picture Mode

: ꕋ Expert1 ꔉ

Digital Noise
Reduction
• Expert
Control

• Backlight

• Contrast

• TruMotion

• Brightness

• H Sharpness 70

• Picture Wizard

• Picture Reset
Black Level
: Low
Real Cinema
• Screen (RGB-PC)
Color Gamut
• LED Local Dimming
: On

□ Sport
□ Game
ꔑ ꕋ Expert1

ꔉ
ꔀ

□ ꕋ Expert2

PICTURE CONTROL

1
2
3
4
5

Select PICTURE.

ENTER

Select Picture Mode.

ENTER

Select � Expert1 or � Expert2.

ENTER

Select Expert Control.

ENTER

Select your desired menu option.

Make appropriate adjustments.

7
BACK

EXIT

136

ꔂ Move

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔉ Enter

Off
R
W

Off

▶
G
C

Dynamic Contrast

◀

Off

Noise Reduction

Off

Gamma

Low

Black Level

Film Mode

Off
Medium
Low
On

Wide

Color Gamut

Edge Enhancer

High

Edge Enhancer

High

xvYcc

Auto

xvYcc

Auto

Expert Pattern

Off

Wide

Expert Pattern

Off

ꔍ

LED LCD TV

Plasma TV

▶

*This feature is not available for all models.

ꔛ

Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness
of the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and
dark parts darker.

ꔛ

Adjusts screen colors so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feature enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, and green
look more vivid.

Skin Color

ꔛ

It detects the skin area of video and adjusts it to express a natural skin color.

Noise Reduction

ꔛ

Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.

Digital Noise
Reduction

ꔛ

Removes noise caused by compressing video.

Dynamic Contrast

Dynamic Color

Gamma

You can adjust brightness of dark areas and middle gray level areas of the
picture.
Low : Make brighter and middle gray level areas of the picture brighter.
Medium : Express original picture levels.
High: Make dark and middle gray level areas of the picture darker.

Black Level

Low: The reflection of the screen gets darker.
High: The reflection of the screen gets brighter.
ꔛ Set black level of the screen to proper level.
ꔛ This function is available in the following modes: TV, AV (NTSC-M), HDMI
or Component.

Clear White

ꔛ

Make the white area of screen brighter and more white.

ꔛ

Adjust the brightness of the screen to prevent the screen from being too
bright. Dims extremely bright pictures.
This feature is enabled in “Picture Mode-Standard, Sports, Game”.

ꔛ

Real Cinema
or
Film Mode

ꔛ

Makes video clips recorded in film look more natural by eliminating judder
effect.
DVD and Blu-ray movies are filmed at 24 frames per second (fps). With
LG Real Cinema, every frame is consistently processed 5 times in 1/24 of
a second producing 120 fps with TruMotion or 2 times in 1/24 of a second
producing 48 fps without TruMotion, thus totally eliminating the judder
effect.
This function can also work when TruMotion is off.

PICTURE CONTROL

Eye Care

LED LCD TV: Advanced Control
Plasma TV: Advanced Control, Expert Control
Standard/sRGB: Displays standard set of colors.
Wide: Increase number of colors used.
ꔛ Maximize the utilization of colors to increase color quality.
Color Gamut

LED LCD TV: Expert Control
ꔛ Displays color domain of the signal.
Standard: Displays standard set of colors.
Wide: Increase number of colors used.
EBU: Mode to display EBU standard color area.
SMPTE: Mode to display SMPTE standard color area.
BT709: Mode to display BT709 standard color area.

137

PICTURE CONTROL
Edge Enhancer

xvYCC

Color Filter

Expert Pattern

ꔛ

Show clearer and distinctive yet natural edges in the video.

ꔛ

This produces richer colors.
This feature represents rich color as much as conventional video signal.
This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema / ꔧ Cinema / ꔧ
Bright Room, ꕋ Expert" when a xvYCC signal is inputted through HDMI.

ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

This function filters specific colors in the video.
You can use the RGB filter to set color saturation and hue accurately.

ꔛ

This is a pattern used for expert adjustment.
This function is enabled in "Picture mode - ꕋ Expert" when you watch
DTV.

ꔛ

Adjusts the overall color of the screen by changing the white baseline.
a. Gamma : Select 1.9, 2.2, 2.4
b. Method : 2 Points
- Pattern: Inner, Outer
- Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness:
The adjustment range is -50 - +50.
c-1. Method : 10 Point IRE (LED LCD TV)
- Pattern: Inner, Outer
- IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video
signal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 - 100. You can adjust Red, Green
or Blue according to each setting.
- Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2
gamma. You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, then the
target luminance value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from
10 IRE to 90 IRE.
- Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 - +50.
c-2. Method : 20 Point IRE (Plasma TV)
- IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video
signal and can be set among 5, 10, 15 - 100. You can adjust Red, Green
or Blue according to each setting.
- Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 - +50.
d. Apply to all inputs
ꔛ

PICTURE CONTROL

Color Temperature

A tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test patterns,
this does not affect other colors but can be used to selectively adjust the
6 color areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Mgt/Yellow).
Color difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjustments for the general video.
Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta.
- Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Color: The adjustment range is
-30 - +30.
- Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint: The adjustment range is -30
- +30.
- This feature is disabled in RGB-PC and HDMI-PC mode.
ꔛ

Color Management
System

138

PICTURE RESET
Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.

PICTURE
• Color

G
• Tint
0 R
? All picture settings will be reset.
C
• Color
Temp. 0 W
Continue?
• Advanced Control

3
4

• Picture Reset

• TruMotion

: Low

Yes

• Color

• Tint

• Color Temp.

• Advanced Control
Resetting
video configuration...
• Picture
Reset

• TruMotion

: Low

• LED Local Dimming : On

ENTER

Select Picture Reset.

ENTER

Select Yes.
Initialize the adjusted value.

ꔉ Enter

• Screen (RGB-PC)

Select PICTURE.

EXIT

ꔉ

ꔂ Move

• Screen (RGB-PC)

ENTER

Noꔀ

PICTURE

PICTURE CONTROL

ꔉ Enter

ꔂ Move

Return to TV viewing.

139

PICTURE CONTROL
TRUMOTION - For LED LCD TV
Advance video technology that provides clearer, smoother images, even during fast action scenes creating a more stable structure for a crisper picture.

PICTURE

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Color

• Tint

• Color Temp.

• Advanced Control

• Picture Reset

• TruMotion

: Low

TruMotion

◀

• Judder

• Blur

Low

▶

� Enter

ꔉ
ꔀ

• Screen (RGB-PC)
• LED Local Dimming : On

1
2

ENTER

Select PICTURE.

ꔛ
ꔛ

Select TruMotion.
ꔛ

PICTURE CONTROL

ENTER

ꔛ
ꔛ

Adjustment for TruMotion (Judder
and Blur) with selecting User
4

ENTER

Select Judder or Blur.
Make appropriate adjustments.

6
BACK

EXIT

140

Select Low, High, User, or Off.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

Off: Turn off TruMotion operation.
Low: Provides smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard
use.
High: Provides smoother picture
movement.
Judder: Adjusts noise of the screen.
Blur: Adjusts after-image of the screen.
TruMotion works with all inputs except
PC mode.
If you enable "TruMotion", noise may
appear on the screen. If this occurs,
set "TruMotion" to "Off".
If you select "Picture Mode-Game"
set "TruMotion" to "Off".

LED LOCAL DIMMING - For LED LCD TV
After analyzing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to improve
the contrast ratio. This feature is disabled in “Picture Mode-Game”.

PICTURE

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

PICTURE

ꔂ Move

• Color

• Tint

• Color Temp.

• Advanced Control

• Picture Reset

• TruMotion

: Low

• TruMotion

: Low

• Screen (RGB-PC)
• LED Local Dimming : On

ꔠ
ꔉ

• Screen (RGB-PC)
• LED Local Dimming : On

□ Off
ꔑ On

1
2

Select PICTURE.

ENTER

Select LED Local Dimming.

ENTER

Select On or Off.

4
BACK

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔠ
ꔉ

PICTURE CONTROL

ꔉ Enter

141

PICTURE CONTROL
POWER INDICATOR - For LED LCD TV
Adjust the power/standby indicator light on the front of the TV.

OPTION

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
• Caption

• Caption
ꔉ
ꔀ

• Initial Setting

PICTURE CONTROL

• Set ID

: Home Use

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

Select Power Indicator.

ꔛ

Select Standby Light or Power Light.
Select your desired options.

BACK

EXIT

142

• Mode Setting

ENTER

◀

Power Light

• Set ID

Select OPTION.

ꔉ Enter

▶

• Initial Setting

ENTER

Standby Light
: Off

• Power Indicator

ꔛ

ꔂ Move

• Language
: Off

• Power Indicator

OPTION

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

Standby Light: Determines whether
to set the indicator light on the front
of the TV to On or Off in standby
mode.
Power Light: Determines whether to
set the indicator light on the front of
the TV to On or Off when the power
turns on.
If you select 3D mode, "Power
Indicator" is turned off automatically
(Except 50/60PK950).

IMAGE STICKING MINIMIZATION (ISM) METHOD - For Plasma TV
A frozen still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods can result in a ghost image. You
can use Orbiter to help prevent image sticking. The other two functions are for removing a ghost
image.

OPTION

ꔂ Move

OPTION

ꔉ Enter

• Language
• Caption

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
: Off

• Caption
ꔉ
ꔀ

• ISM Method

: Off

• ISM Method

• Initial Setting

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

ꔑ Normal
□ Orbiter

ꔉ

ꔡ

□ Color Wash
□ White Wash

1
2

Select OPTION.

ENTER

Select ISM Method.

ENTER

Select Normal, Orbiter, Color Wash,
or White Wash.

4
EXIT

ꔛ

Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

Normal: If image sticking is never a
problem, ISM is not necessary - set
to Normal.
Orbiter: To avoid a ghost image on
the screen, the image will move every
2 minutes to help prevent ghost
images. However, it is best not to
allow any fixed image to remain on
the screen.
Color Wash: The color block with the
screen moved a little and the white
pattern are displayed. It is difficult to
see the after image on all colors.
Once it has been corrected it will not
be visible in any color.
White Wash: White Wash removes
ghost images from the screen. Use
sparingly. Watch the TV normally for
a while before using this feature to
see if the ghost image disappears on
its own.

PICTURE CONTROL

! NOTE
►An excessive ghosted image may be
impossible to clear entirely with White
? Wash. To return to normal viewing, press
the any button.

143

SOUND
SOUND &&LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE
CONTROL
CONTROL
AUTO VOLUME
Auto Volume makes sure that the volume level remains consistent whether you are watching a commercial or a regular TV program.
Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed
every time the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making
automatic adjustments for each program.

AUDIO

ꔂ Move

• Auto Volume

: Off

• Clear Voice II

: Off � 3

• Balance

1
2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

144

ꔉ

ꔡ
0

• Auto Volume

: On

• Clear Voice II

: Off � 3

• Balance

ꔑ On
0 L

• Sound Mode

: Standard

• Infinite Sound:Off

• Treble

• Bass

• Reset

Select Auto Volume.

ENTER

Select On or Off.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔉ Enter

□ Off

: Standard

ENTER

EXIT

ꔂ Move

Select AUDIO.

BACK

AUDIO

• Sound Mode

ꔉ Enter

ꔠ
ꔉ
R

CLEAR VOICE II
By differentiating the human sound range from others, it improves the sound quality of voices.

AUDIO

ꔂ Move

• Auto Volume

: Off

• Clear Voice II

: Off � 3

ꔉ
ꔀ

• Balance

1
2
3

• Sound Mode

: Standard

ꔉ Enter

• Infinite Sound:Off

• Treble

• Bass

• Reset

Select On or Off.

Select Level.
Make appropriate adjustments.
Return to the previous menu.

◀

�3

Off

▶
+

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

Adjustment for Clear Voice Level
with selecting On

ꔉ Enter

• Clear Voice II
L
0• Level

ENTER

EXIT

: Off � 3

• Balance

• Treble

Select Clear Voice II.

BACK

: Off

• Clear Voice II

• Infinite Sound:Off

ENTER

• Auto Volume

: Standard

Select AUDIO.

ꔂ Move

• Sound Mode

AUDIO

Return to TV viewing.

145

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
BALANCE
Adjust the left/right sound of speaker to suit your taste and room situations.

AUDIO

ꔂ Move

2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

146

: Off

• Auto Volume

: Off

: Off � 3

• Clear Voice II

: Off � 3

ꔀ

R ꔉ

: Standard

• Sound Mode

: Standard

• Infinite Sound:Off

• Treble

• Bass

• Reset

Select Balance.

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔉ Enter

• Balance
0 ◀
L
R
0 ꔉ

ENTER

EXIT

• Balance

• Sound Mode

Select AUDIO.

BACK

ꔂ Move

• Clear Voice II

AUDIO

• Auto Volume

• Balance

ꔉ Enter

▶

PRESET SOUND SETTINGS (SOUND MODE)
Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any special adjustment using factory presets.

AUDIO

ꔂ Move

: Off

• Auto Volume

: Off

• Clear Voice II

: Off � 3

• Clear Voice II

: Off � 3

R
ꔉ
ꔀ

• Balance

• Sound Mode

: Standard

• Infinite Sound:Off

• Treble

• Bass

• Reset

• Sound Mode

Select AUDIO.

ꔛ

ENTER

Select Sound Mode.

ꔛ

ENTER

Select Standard, Music, Cinema,
Sport, or Game.

4
BACK

EXIT

ꔂ Move

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

: Standard

ꔉ Enter

0 L
ꔑ Standard

□ Music
• Infinite Sound:Off
□ Cinema
• Treble
50
□ Sport
• Bass
50
□ Game
• Reset

ꔉ

ꔡ

Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport, and
Game are preset for optimum sound
quality at the factory.
You can also adjust Sound Mode in
the Q.MENU.
Standard: Offers standard-quality
sound.
Music: Optimizes sound for listening
to music.
Cinema: Optimizes sound for watching movies.
Sport: Optimizes sound for watching
sports events.
Game: Optimizes sound for playing
games.

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

AUDIO

• Auto Volume

• Balance

ꔉ Enter

147

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT - USER MODE
Adjust the sound to suit your taste and room situations.
AUDIO

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

AUDIO

ꔂ Move

• Auto Volume

: Off

• Auto Volume

: Off

• Clear Voice II

: Off � 3

• Clear Voice II

: Off � 3

• Balance

ꔉ Enter

• Sound Mode

: Standard

• Sound Mode

• Infinite Sound:Off

• Infinite Sound
• Infinite Sound:Off

• Treble

• Bass

• Reset

ꔉ
ꔀ

: Standard

50 • Treble
50 • Bass

Off
50

◀

▶

50
Close

1
2
3
4
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

148

Select AUDIO.

ENTER

Select Sound Mode.

ENTER

Select Standard, Music, Cinema,
Sport, or Game.

ENTER

Select Infinite Sound, Treble, or Bass.

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.

6
BACK

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

If sound quality or volume is not at
the level you want, it is recommended
to use a separate home theater system or amp to cope with different
user environments.
If you select “Clear Voice II-On”, the
Infinite Sound feature will not operate.
Infinite Sound: Infinite Sound is a
patented LG proprietary sound processing technology that strives
immersive 5.1 surround sound with
just two front speakers.

AUDIO RESET
Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.

AUDIO

ꔂ Move

• Clear Voice II

• Balance
• Sound Mode

• TV Speaker

3
4

Yes

: On

Select AUDIO.

ENTER

Select Reset.

ENTER

Select Yes.

ENTER

EXIT

Initialize the adjusted value.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔉ
ꔀ

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

: Off � 3

• Balance

• Sound Mode

: Standard

• Infinite Sound:Off
i Resetting audio configuration...
• Treble
50

• Bass

• Reset

• TV Speaker

: On

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

: Standard

• Reset

AUDIO
• Clear Voice II

• Infinite Sound:Off
? All audio settings will be resetted.
• Treble
50
Continue?
• Bass
50

ꔉ Enter

: Off � 3

149

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
TV SPEAKERS ON/OFF SETUP
If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers.

AUDIO
• Clear Voice II

ꔂ Move

• Balance

1
2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

150

• Sound Mode

: Standard

• Balance

: Standard

• Infinite Sound:Off

• Treble

• Bass

• Reset

• TV Speaker

: On

• TV Speaker

: On

ENTER

Select TV Speaker.

ENTER

Select On or Off.

EXIT

ꔂ Move

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔠ
ꔉ

ꔉ Enter

: Off � 3

• Sound Mode

Select AUDIO.

BACK

AUDIO
• Clear Voice II

ꔉ Enter

: Off � 3

□ Off
ꔑ On

ꔠ
ꔉ

STEREO/SAP BROADCAST SETUP
On analog signals, this TV can receive MTS stereo programs and any SAP (Secondary Audio
Program) that accompanies the stereo program if the station transmits an additional sound signal.
Mono sound is automatically used if the broadcast is only in Mono.

Multi Audio

English �

ꕉ Exit

1
2

Digital TV

Q.MENU

Select SAP.

ENTER

Select Mono, Stereo, or
SAP.

3
EXIT

Return to TV viewing.

1
2

Q.MENU

Select Multi Audio.

ENTER

Select other languages.

3
EXIT

Return to TV viewing.

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

Analog TV

151

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUDIO LANGUAGE
This feature operates only in DTV/Cable DTV mode.

OPTION

ꔂ Move

• Language
• Caption

ꔉ

: Off

• Power Indicator

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

152

2
3

: Off

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

Select Language.

ENTER

Select Audio Language.
Select your desired language.

EXIT

• Caption
• Initial Setting

ENTER

BACK

• Language

Select OPTION.

ꔂ Move

• Set ID

ꔡ

OPTION

• Power Indicator

• Initial Setting

ꔉ Enter

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔉ Enter

Menu Language

English

Audio Language

◀ English ▶

ON-SCREEN MENUS LANGUAGE SELECTION
The menus can be shown on the screen in the selected language.

OPTION

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
• Caption

1
2

ꔡ

• Initial Setting

• Initial Setting
:1

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

Select Language.

ENTER

Select Menu Language.
Select your desired language.
From this point on, the on-screen menus
will be shown in the selected language.

EXIT

: Off

• Set ID

ENTER

BACK

• Caption
• Power Indicator

Select OPTION.

• Language

• Power Indicator

ꔂ Move

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔉ Enter

Menu Language

◀ English ▶

Audio Language

English

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

ꔉ

: Off

OPTION

153

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
CAPTION MODE
Analog Broadcasting System Captions
Captions are provided to help the hearing impaired watch TV. Select a caption mode for displaying
captioning information if provided on a program. Analog caption displays information at any position
on the screen and is usually the program's dialog. Caption/Text, if provided by the broadcaster, would
be available for both digital and analog channels on the Antenna/Cable. This TV is programmed to
memorize the caption/text mode which was last set when you turned the power off. This function is
only available when Caption Mode is set On.

OPTION

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
• Caption

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

154

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

Select Caption.

ENTER

Select On.
Select CC1-4 or Text1-4.

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

◀

ꔉ Enter

Mode

• Initial Setting

ENTER

BACK

: CC1

Select OPTION.

• Caption

• Set ID

ꔉ
ꔀ

• Power Indicator

• Initial Setting

ꔂ Move

• Language
: Off

• Power Indicator

OPTION

▶
CC1

Digital Option
Close

When selecting Off, Sub-menus for
Analog, DTV, and Digital Option
become disabled.
Caption
The term for the words that scroll
across the bottom of the TV screen;
usually the audio portion of the program provided for the hearing
impaired.
Text
The term for the words that appear in
a large black frame and almost cover
the entire screen; usually messages
provided by the broadcaster.

Digital Broadcasting System Captions
Choose the language you want the DTV/Cable DTV Captions to appear in.
Other Languages can be chosen for digital sources only if they are included on the program.
This function in only available when Caption Mode is set On.

OPTION

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
• Caption

ꔉ
ꔀ

• Power Indicator

• Initial Setting

• Initial Setting
:1

• Set ID

: Home Use

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

ENTER

Select On.
Select CC1-4, Text1-4, or Service1 - 6.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

◀

Mode

• Mode Setting

Select Caption.

EXIT

: CC1

• Set ID

ENTER

BACK

• Caption

• Power Indicator

Select OPTION.

ꔉ Enter

• Language
: Off

ꔂ Move

▶
CC1

Digital Option
Close

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

OPTION

155

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Caption Option
Customize the DTV/Cable DTV captions that appear on your screen.
This function in only available when Caption Mode is set On.
◀

OPTION
• Language
• Caption

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

Mode

• Initial Setting
• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

Font 1

Text Color

▶

■ White

Text Opacity

CC1

Solid

Bg Color

Digital Option
Close

▶
A Standard

Font

◀
On
: CC1 ꔉ

• Power Indicator

Custom

Size

■ Black

Bg Opacity

Solid

Edge Type

None

Edge Color

■ Black
Close

Select OPTION.

ꔛ
ꔛ

2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

ꔛ
ENTER

4
5

Select On.
Select Digital Option.

ꔛ

ꔛ
ENTER

Select Custom.
Customize the Size, Font, etc., to your
preference. A preview icon is provided
at the bottom of the screen, use it to
see the caption language.

6
7
BACK

EXIT

156

Select Caption.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

Size: Set the word size.
Font: Select a typeface for the text.
Text Color: Choose a color for the
text.
Text Opacity: Specify the opacity for
the text color.
Bg (Background) Color: Select a
background color.
Bg (Background) Opacity: Select the
opacity for the background color.
Edge Type: Select an edge type.
Edge Color: Select a color for the
edges.

TIME SETTING
CLOCK SETTING
Auto Clock Setup
The time is set automatically from a digital channel signal.
The digital channel signal includes information for the current time provided by the broadcasting station.
Set the clock manually if the current time is set incorrectly by the auto clock function.

TIME

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock

ꔉ

• Off Time

: Off

• On TIme
• Sleep Timer

ꔡ

TIME

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock ꔉ
◀
Auto
• Off Time

: Off

• On TIme

: Off

• Sleep Timer

: Off

Month

▶
02

Date

Year

2010

Hour

10 AM

Minute

Time Zone

Eastern

Daylight Saving

Auto
Close

1
2

Select TIME.

ENTER

Select Clock.

ENTER

Select Auto.

Select your viewing area time zone.
USA: Eastern, Central, Mountain,
Pacific, Alaska, or Hawaii.
Canada: Eastern, Central, Mountain,
Pacific, New Foundland, or Atlantic.

Select Auto, Off, or On (depending
on whether or not your viewing area
observes Daylight Saving time).

6
BACK

EXIT

TIME SETTING

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

157

TIME SETTING
Manual Clock Setup
If the current time setting is wrong, reset the clock manually.

TIME

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock

ꔉ

• Off Time

: Off

• On TIme

: Off

• Sleep Timer

: Off

ꔡ

TIME

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock ꔉ
◀
Manual
• Off Time
: Off
Month
• On TIme
: Off
Date
• Sleep Timer
: Off

2010

Hour

10 AM
10

Time Zone

Eastern

Daylight Saving

Auto
Close

2
3
TIME SETTING

Select TIME.

ENTER

Select Clock.

ENTER

Select Manual.

Select the Year, Month, Date, Hour, or Minute
option.

Set the Year, Month, Date, Hour, or Minute
option.

6
BACK

EXIT

158

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

Year

Minute

▶
02

AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING
This function operates only if the current time has been set.
The Off Time function overrides the On Time function if they are both set to the same time.
The TV must be in standby mode for the On Time to work.
If you do not press any button within 2 hours after the TV turns on with the On Time function, the TV
will automatically revert to standby mode.

TIME

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock

TIME

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock

• Off Time

: Off

• On TIme

: Off

• Sleep Timer

: Off

ꔉ
ꔀ

ꔎ Feb. 21, 2010 10:10 AM

• Off Time

: Off

• On TIme

: 6:30 AM (Once) ꔉ
Repeat
: Off
Hour

• Sleep Timer

◀ Once ▶
6 AM

Minute

Input

Channel

TV 2-0

Volume

30
Close

1
2

Select TIME.

ꔛ

To cancel On/Off Time function, select
Off.
Only for On Time function

ENTER

Select Off Time or On Time.

ENTER

Select Repeat.

Select Off, Once, Daily, Mon.~Fri.,
Mon.~Sat., Sat.~ Sun., or Sun..

Select and set Hour or Minute.

6
BACK

EXIT

3
4

Select Input.
Select the desired input source.
When Selecting TV:
set the channel at turn-on.

TIME SETTING

Adjust to sound level at
turn-on.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

159

TIME SETTING
SLEEP TIMER SETTING
The Sleep Timer turns the TV off at the preset time.
Note that this setting is cleared when the TV is turned off.

TIME

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock

TIME

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Clock

• Off Time

: Off

• Off Time

: Off

• On TIme

: Off

• On TIme

: Off

• Sleep Timer

: Off

ꔠ
ꔉ

• Sleep Timer

ꔑ Off

□ 10 min.
: Off ꔉ
□ 20 min.

ꔉ

ꔡ

□ 30 min.
□ 60 min.
□ 90 min.
□ 120 min.
□ 180 min.
□ 240 min.

1
2
3

ENTER

Select Sleep Timer.

ENTER

Make appropriate adjustments.

4
BACK

TIME SETTING

160

Select TIME.

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ
ꔛ

To cancel the Sleep Timer, select Off.
You can also adjust Sleep Timer in
the Q.MENU.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS

Parental Control can be used to block specific channels, ratings and other viewing sources.
The Parental Control Function (V-Chip) is used to block program viewing based on the ratings sent by
the broadcasting station. The default setting is to allow all programs to be viewed. Viewing can be
blocked by choosing the type of the program and the categories. It is also possible to block all program viewing for a time period. To use this function, the following must be done :
1. Set ratings and categories to be blocked.
2. Specify a password
3. Enable the lock

V-Chip rating and categories
Rating guidelines are provided by broadcasting stations. Most television programs and television movies can be blocked by TV Rating and/or Individual Categories. Movies that have been shown at the
theaters or direct-to-video movies use the Movie Rating System (MPAA) only.

Ratings for Television programs including made-for-TV movies:
TV-G (General audience)
TV-PG (Parental guidance suggested)
ꔛ TV-14 (Parents strongly cautioned)
ꔛ TV-MA (Mature audience only)
ꔛ TV-Y
(All children)
ꔛ TV-Y7 (Children 7 years older)
ꔛ
ꔛ

SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM
Setting up Your Password
Set up blocking schemes to block specific channels, ratings, and external viewing sources.
A password is required to gain access to this menu.
For Canada

For USA
ꔂ Move

• Set Password

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
0

ꔉ Enter
ꔉ

• Lock System

: On

ꔡ

LOCK

ꔂ Move

• Set Password

ꔉ

ꔡ

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-English

• TV Rating-Children

• TV Rating-French

• TV Rating-General

• Downloadable Rating

• Input Block

• Key Lock

: Off

ENTER

Select LOCK.

Input the password.

ꔉ Enter

ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

Enter Password

Enter the password as requested.
The TV is set up with the initial
password “0-0-0-0”.
If you forget your password, press
“0-3-2-5” on the remote control.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

LOCK

161

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password
Change the password by inputting a new password twice.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

1
2

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

: On

ꔡ

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
0

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

162

5
BACK

EXIT

• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-Children

• TV Rating-General

• Downloadable Rating

• Input Block

Input the password.

Confirm

• Movie Rating

Select LOCK.

Choose any 4 digits for your new
password.
As soon as the 4 digits are entered,
re-enter the same 4 digits on the
Confirm.

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔉ Enter

New

• Block Channel

Select Set Password.

ENTER

• Set Password
: On

ꔂ Move

• Lock System

ENTER

ꔉ

• Lock System

LOCK

Lock System
Enables or disables the blocking scheme you set up previously.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

LOCK

ꔂ Move

• Set Password

ꔉ Enter

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

□ Off
: On ꔉ
ꔑ On
• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-Children

• TV Rating-General

• Downloadable Rating

• Input Block

ENTER

Select LOCK.

ꔉ
ꔀ

• Lock System

ꔛ

ꔠ
ꔉ

When you select On, the Lock
System is enable.

Input the password.

3
4

Select Lock System.

ENTER

5
BACK

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

EXIT

Select On or Off.

163

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
CHANNEL BLOCKING
Blocks any channels that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.

Block Channel

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

Favorite Group:

DTV
3-1

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-Children

• TV Rating-General

• Downloadable Rating

• Input Block

A
TV

page 1/1

Cable DTV

Cable TV

5-1

7-1

ꔉ
ꔀ

ꔉ CH.Change

ꔂ Navigation

ꘃ Page Change

ꕉ Previous

ꔅ Block/Unblock

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

ENTER

Select LOCK.

Input the password.

3
4

Select Block Channel.

ENTER

YELLOW

6
BACK

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

164

EXIT

Select a channel to block or unblock.
Block or unblock a channel.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

If a channel is locked, enter the
password to unlock it temporarily.

MOVIE & TV RATING
Movie Rating (MPAA)- For USA
Blocks movies according to the movie ratings limits specified, so children cannot view certain movies.
You can set the ratings limit by blocking out all the movies with the ratings above a specified level.
Keep in mind that the movie ratings limit only applies to movies shown on TV, not TV programs, such
as soap operas.
LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

• Lock System

: On

• Lock System

• Block Channel

Blocking off : Permits all
programs
• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

• Movie Rating ꔉ
G

• TV Rating-Children

• TV Rating-Children
PG

• TV Rating-General

• TV Rating-General
PG-13

• Downloadable Rating

• DownloadableRRating

• Input Block

• Input Block NC-17

ꔉ
ꔀ

: On

X
Blocking Off ꔓ

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

ENTER

Select LOCK.

Input the password.

3
4

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

Select Movie Rating.

ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ

ENTER

Select G, PG, PG-13, R, NC-17, X, or
Blocking Off.

ꔛ
ꔛ

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

BACK

If Movie Rating, TV Rating-Children
or TV Rating-General is locked, enter
the password to unlock it temporarily.
G (General audience)
PG (Parental guidance suggested)
PG-13 (Parents strongly cautioned)
R (Restricted)
NC-17 (No one 17 and under admitted)
X (Adult only)
Blocking Off (Permits all programs)
If you set PG-13: G and PG movies
will be available, PG-13, R, NC-17 and
X will be blocked.

165

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
TV Rating Children - For USA
revents children from watching certain children's TV programs, according to the ratings limit set. The
P
children rating does not apply to other TV programs. Unless you block certain TV programs intended
for mature audiences in the TV Rating - sub menu, your children can view those programs.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

• Set Password
: On

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-Children

Fantasy Violence
• TV Rating-Children ꔉ

• TV Rating-General

• Downloadable Rating

• Input Block

ENTER

ꔉ
ꔀ

Select LOCK.

Input the password.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

166

Select TV Rating-Children.

ENTER

Select Age or Fantasy Violence.

ENTER

Select block options.

6
BACK

EXIT

ꔉ Enter

• Lock System

ꔂ Move

ꔛ
ꔛ

LOCK

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

Age

ꔉ

Age (applies to TV-Y, TV-Y7)
Fantasy Violence (applies to TV-Y7)

TV Rating General - For USA
Based on the ratings, blocks certain TV programs that you and your family do not want to view.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

• Lock System

: On

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• Block Channel Age

• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-Children

• TV Rating-Children
Language

• TV Rating-General

• TV Rating-General ꔉ
Sex

• Downloadable Rating

• Downloadable Rating
Violence

• Input Block

ꔉ
ꔀ

ꔉ

Dialogue

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

ENTER

Select LOCK.

Input the password.

ꔛ

3
4
5

ꔛ

Select TV Rating-General.
ꔛ
ENTER

Select Age, Dialogue, Language, Sex
or Violence.

ENTER

Select block options.

BACK

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

ꔛ

Age (applies to TV-G,T V-PG,T V14,TV-MA).
Dialogue-sexual dialogue (applies to
TV-PG,TV-14).
Language-adult language (applies to
TV-PG, TV-14, TV-MA).
Sex-sexual situations (applies to
TV-PG, TV-14, TV-MA).
Violence (applies to TV-PG, TV-14,
TV-MA).

167

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
TV Rating English - For CANADA
Selecting Canadian English rating system.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

LOCK

ꔂ Move

• Set Password

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• TV Rating-English

• TV Rating-French

Blocking off : Permits all
programs

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• TV Rating-English

• TV Rating-French

• Downloadable Rating

• Input Block

• Key Lock

: Off

• Key Lock

: Off

ꔉ
ꔀ

ꔉ Enter

E
C
C8+
G
PG
14+
18+
Blocking Off ꔓ

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

ENTER

Select LOCK.

Input the password.

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

Select TV Rating-English.

ꔛ
ꔛ

ENTER

ꔛ
ꔛ

5
BACK

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

168

Select E, C, C8+, G, PG, 14+, 18+, or
Blocking Off.

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ
ꔛ

If TV Rating-English or TV RatingFrench is locked, enter the password
to unlocked it temporarily.
E (Exempt)
C (Children)
C8+ (Children eight years and older)
G (General programming, suitable
for all audiences)
PG (Parental Guidance)
14+ (Viewers 14 years and older)
18+ (Adult programming)
Blocking Off (Permits all programs)

TV Rating French - For CANADA
Selecting Canadian French rating system.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

LOCK

ꔂ Move

• Set Password

ꔉ Enter

Blocking off : Permits all
programs

• Lock System

: On

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• TV Rating-English

• TV Rating-English E

• TV Rating-French

• Downloadable Rating

• TV Rating-French G
• Downloadable Rating8ans+

• Input Block

13ans+

• Key Lock

: Off

• Key Lock

: Off

16ans+

ꔉ
ꔀ

18ans+
Blocking Off ꔓ

ENTER

Select LOCK.

ꔛ
ꔛ

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

Input the password.

3
4

ꔛ

Select TV Rating-French.

ENTER

ꔛ

Select E, G, 8ans+, 13ans+, 16ans+,
18ans+, or Blocking Off.

ꔛ

ꔛ
BACK

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

EXIT

E (Exempt)
G (General)
8ans+ (General-Not convenient for
little children)
13ans+ (Not convenient for children
of 13 years and younger)
16ans+ (Not convenient for children
of 16 years and younger)
18ans+ (This programs is only for
adults)
Blocking Off (Permits all programs)

169

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
DOWNLOADABLE RATING

This
function is available only for digital channels.
This function operates only when TV has received Region5 Rating data.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Set Password

• Lock System

: On

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

Humor
• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-Children

Sport
• TV Rating-Children

• TV Rating-General

• Downloadable Rating

Cruelty
• TV Rating-General
Language
• Downloadable
Rating ꔉ

• Input Block

ꔉ
ꔀ

ꔉ

• Input Block Sadness
Genre

Age

ꔍ
Close

ꔛ

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

ENTER

Select LOCK.

Input the password.

3
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

170

4
5

Select Downloadable Rating.

ENTER

Select desired Downloadable Rating
option.

ENTER

Select desired option and block it.

6
BACK

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

Based on rating table, your TV's
OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from what is shown in
this manual.

If a Downloadable rating is locked,
enter the password to unlock it temporarily.

EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING
Enables you to block an input.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Lock System

: On

• Lock System

• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

• AV1
• Block Channel
• AV2
• Movie
Rating

• TV Rating-Children

• TV •Rating-Children
Component1

• TV Rating-General

• Downloadable Rating

• TV Rating-General
• Component2
• Downloadable Rating
• RGB-PC
• Input Block

• Key Lock

: Off • HDMI1

Off

• HDMI2

Off

• HDMI3

Off

• HDMI4

Off

• Input Block

• Key Lock

: Off

ꔉ
ꔀ

: On

◀

Off

▶

Off
Off
Off
Off

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

ENTER

Select LOCK.

Input the password.

3
4

Select Input Block.

ENTER

Select input source.

6
BACK

EXIT

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

Select On or Off.

171

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
KEY LOCK
This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing by locking out the front panel controls, so
that it can only be used with the remote control.
This TV is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you turn the TV off.

LOCK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

LOCK

ꔂ Move

• Lock System

: On

• Lock System

: On

• Block Channel

• Movie Rating

• TV Rating-Children

• TV Rating-General

• Downloadable Rating

• Input Block

• Key Lock

: Off

• Key Lock

: On

ꔠ
ꔉ

□ Off
ꔑ On

2 ABC 3 DEF

4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ

ENTER

Select LOCK.

ꔛ

Input the password.

3
4
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING

172

Select Key Lock.

ENTER

5
BACK

EXIT

Select On or Off.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

ꔛ

ꔉ Enter

ꔠ
ꔉ
ꔠ
ꔉ

In Key Lock ‘On’, if the TV is turned
off, press the / I, INPUT, CH (ꔌꔍor
ꕌꕍ) button on the TV or POWER,
INPUT, CH (ꕌꕍ) or NUMBER buttons on the remote control.
With the Key Lock On, the display
‘ ! Key Lock’ appears on the screen
if any button on the front panel is
pressed while viewing the TV.

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING
Abnormal Operation
ꔛ

The remote control
doesn’t work

ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

TV turns off suddenly

ꔛ
ꔛ

Check to see if there is any object between the product and the remote
control causing obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control
directly at the TV.
Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).
Ensure that the correct remote operating mode is set: TV, VCR etc.
*This feature is not available for all models.
Install new batteries.
Is the sleep timer set?
Check the power control settings. Power interrupted.
If there is no signal, the TV turns off automatically in 15 minutes.

Video Problems
ꔛ
ꔛ

No picture &No sound

ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ

Picture appears slowly
after switching on

No or poor color or
poor picture

ꔛ

This is normal, the image is muted during the product startup process.
Please contact your service center, if the picture has not appeared after
five minutes.

ꔛ

Adjust Color in menu option.
Keep a sufficient distance between the product and the VCR.
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
Are the video cables installed properly?
Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.

ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ

Poor reception on
some channels
Lines or streaks in pictures
No picture when connecting HDMI

ꔛ

Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power
tool.

ꔛ

Station or cable product experiencing problems, tune to another station.
Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station.
Check for sources of possible interference.

ꔛ

Check antenna (Change the direction of the antenna).

ꔛ

If an HDMI cable doesn’t support High Speed HDMI, it can cause flickers
or no screen display. In this case use the latest cables that support High
Speed HDMI.

ꔛ

APPENDIX

Horizontal/vertical bars
or picture shaking

Check whether the product is turned on.
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
Is the power cord inserted into wall power outlet?
Check your antenna direction and/or location.
Test the wall power outlet, plug another product’s power cord into the
outlet where the product’s power cord was plugged in.

173

APPENDIX

Audio Problems
No output from one
of the speakers
Unusual sound from
inside the product
No sound
when connecting
HDMI/USB

ꔛ

Adjust Balance in menu option.

ꔛ

A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual
noise when the product is turned on or off and does not indicate a fault
with the product.

ꔛ

Check High Speed HDMI cable.
Check USB cable over version 2.0.
Use normal MP3 file.
*This feature is not available for all models.

ꔛ
ꔛ

PC Mode Problems
The signal is out of
range
Vertical bar or stripe
on
background &
Horizontal Noise &
Incorrect position
Screen color is unstable or single color
When connecting the
HDMI cable to the PC,
there is no audio.

APPENDIX

174

ꔛ
ꔛ

Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency on the PC.
Check the input source.

ꔛ

Activate the Auto configure feature or adjust size, phase, or H/V position.
(Option)

ꔛ

Check the signal cable.
Reinstall the PC video card.

ꔛ

Check the manual for the video card in the PC to see if it supports
HDMI audio and how to set it up properly.

Movie List Problems
The file does not
appear on the Movie
List.
Message is displayed
saying “This file is
invalid” or the audio is
working normally but
the video is not working normally.
Message is displayed
saying “Unsupported
Audio” or the video is
working normally but
the audio is not working normally.

ꔛ

Check whether the file extension is supported.

ꔛ

Check whether the file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the
file is damaged.)
Check whether the resolution is supported.
Check whether the video/audio codec is supported.
Check whether the frame rate is supported.

ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

Subtitle is not working.

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

Check whether the
file is damaged.)
Check whether the
Check whether the
Check whether the

file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the
audio codec is supported.
bit rate is supported.
sample rate is supported.

Check whether the file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the
file is damaged.)
Check whether the video file and subtitle file name are the same.
Check whether the video file and subtitle file are located in the same
folder.
Check whether the subtitle file is supported.
Check whether the language is supported. (When you open the subtitle
file on a PC, you can check the language of the subtitle file.)

APPENDIX

175

APPENDIX
MAINTENANCE
Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can extend the amount of time you
can enjoy your new TV.
Caution: Be sure to turn the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.

Cleaning the Screen
1
2

ere’s a great way to keep the dust off your screen for a while. Wet a soft cloth in a mixture of
H
lukewarm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it’s
almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen.
Make sure the excess water is off the screen, and then let it air-dry before you turn on your TV.

Cleaning the Cabinet
!

ꔛ
ꔛ

To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
Please be sure not to use a wet cloth.

Extended Absence
CAUTION
► If you expect to leave your TV dormant for a long time (such as a vacation), it’s a good idea to
unplug the power cord to protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.

APPENDIX

176

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
47LX9500
(47LX9500-UA)

55LX9500
(55LX9500-UA)

1085.9 mm x 710.6 mm x 255.0 mm
(42.7 inch x 27.9 inch x 10.0 inch)

1255.8 mm x 805.0 mm x 255.0 mm
(49.4 inch x 31.6 inch x 10.0 inch)

1085.9 mm x 654.2 mm x 31.6 mm
(42.7 inch x 25.7 inch x 1.2 inch)

1255.8 mm x 749.6 mm x 31.6 mm
(49.4 inch x 29.5 inch x 1.2 inch)

MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)

With stand

Weight

With stand

26.7 kg (58.8 lbs)

32.7 kg (72.0 lbs)

Without stand

22.1 kg (48.7 lbs)

28.1 kg (61.9 lbs)

Without stand

Power requirement

AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

Television System

NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM

Program Coverage

VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135

External Antenna Impedance
Environment
condition

Operating Temperature

0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)

Operating Humidity

Less than 80 %

Storage Temperature

-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)

Storage Humidity
ꔛ

75 Ω

Less than 85 %

The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

APPENDIX

177

APPENDIX

MODELS
With stand

1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
(44.3 inch x 29.8 inch x 11.1 inch)

1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 345.0 mm
(51.4 inch x 34.1 inch x 13.5 inch)

Without stand

1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
(44.3 inch x 27.2 inch x 1.1 inch)

1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm
(51.4 inch x 31.3 inch x 1.2 inch)

Weight

With stand

22.9 kg (50.4 lbs)

34.5 kg (76.0 lbs)

Without stand

19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)

28.8 kg (63.4 lbs)

60LEX9
(60LEX9-UA)

72LEX9
(72LEX9-UA)

Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)

With stand

1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
(44.3 inch x 29.8 inch x 11.1 inch)

1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 345.0 mm
(51.4 inch x 34.1 inch x 13.5 inch)

Without stand

1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
(44.3 inch x 27.2 inch x 1.1 inch)

1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm
(51.4 inch x 31.3 inch x 1.2 inch)

Weight

With stand

22.9 kg (50.4 lbs)

34.5 kg (76.0 lbs)

Without stand

19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)

28.8 kg (63.4 lbs)

Power requirement

AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

Television System

NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM

Program Coverage

VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135

External Antenna Impedance
Environment
condition

Operating Temperature

75 Ω
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)

Operating Humidity

Less than 80 %

Storage Temperature

-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)

Storage Humidity

APPENDIX

178

55LEX8
(55LEX8-UA)

Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)

MODELS

ꔛ

47LEX8
(47LEX8-UA)

Less than 85 %

The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

50PK950
(50PK950-UA, 50PK950-UF)

60PK950
(60PK950-UA, 60PK950-UF)

1190.0 mm x 804.5 mm x 294.5 mm
(46.8 inch x 31.6 inch x 11.5 inch)

1408.8 mm x 937.9 mm x 384.0 mm
(55.4 inch x 36.9 inch x 15.1 inch)

1190.0 mm x 737.0 mm x 52.4 mm
(46.1 inch x 29.0 inch x 2.0 inch)

1408.8 mm x 860.7 mm x 52.4 mm
(55.4 inch x 33.8 inch x 2.0 inch)

MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)

With stand

Weight

With stand

34.8 kg (76.7 lbs)

50.9 kg (112.2 lbs)

Without stand

30.2 kg (66.5 lbs)

43.3 kg (95.4 lbs)

Without stand

Power requirement

AC 100-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

Television System

NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM

Program Coverage

VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135

External Antenna Impedance
Environment
condition

Operating Temperature

0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)

Operating Humidity

Less than 80 %

Storage Temperature

-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)

Storage Humidity
ꔛ

75 Ω

Less than 85 %

The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

APPENDIX

179

APPENDIX
IR CODES
*This feature is not available for all models.

1. How to Connect

Lead code

ꔛ

High custom code

Lead code
Lead code
Lead code
Lead
Leadcode
code
Lead code

code Low
custom Low
code
Lead

Data code

Data code
Data code
High custom High
code custom code
Data code
Data code
High custom code
Data code
Data code
High
Data
Data
Highcustom
customcode
code
Datacode
code
Datacode
code
High custom
Data code
Data code
High code

2. Remote
IR Codes
Lead Control
Low
ꔛ

Data code

Connect your wired remote control to the Remote Control port on the TV.
Data code

custom code

Data code

High
High
Data code
Data code
Data code
Data code
Low
High code custom code
code code custom code custom
custom
Low
High
code
code
Low
High
C0
C1
C2
C3 C4 C5 C6 C7Data
D0 D1
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Data
D7
D0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data
code
Data
code
custom
code
custom
code
Data
code
Data
code
Low
High
custom
custom
code
customcode
code
custom
code
C0
D1
D1
Data
code
Data
code
C0 C1
C2 C3
C4C1
C5C2
C6C3
C7C4
D0C5
D1C6
D2C7
D3D0
D4
D5D2
D6D3
D7D4
D0D5
D1D6
D2D7
D3D0
D4
D5D2
D6D3
D7D4 D5 D6 D7
custom code
code
C0 custom
C1 C2 C3
C4 C5 C6 C7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
C0
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
C0C1
C1 C2
C2C3
C3C4
C4C5
C5C6
C6C7
C7D0
D0D1
D1 D2
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Lead
code
Low
code
High
custom
code
Data code
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
D0code
D1 D2
D3
D4
D5
D6custom
D7
D0custom
D1
D2 High
D3
D4
D5 code
D6code
D7
Lead
code
Low
custom
code
custom
Data code
Lead
Low
custom
code
High
code
Data
Tc
Tc
Tc
Lead code Lead
Low
custom
code
High
custom
code
Data
code
code
Low
custom
code
High
custom
code
Data
code
Lead
code
Low
custom
code
High
custom
code
Data
code
Lead
code
Low
custom
code
High
custom
code
Data
code
Tc
Lead code Low custom code High custom code Data code
Tc
Tc
Lead
Leadcode
codeLow
Lowcustom
customcode
code High
Highcustom
customcode
codeData
Datacode
code
Lead
Tc
Leadcode
codeLow
Lowcustom
customcode
code High
Highcustom
customcode
codeData
Datacode
code
Lead code Low custom code High custom code Data code
T1
T1
T1 T1
T1
T1
T1

Lead
Lead
code
Lead
Lead
code
Lead
code
code
code

Output waveform

Single pulse, modulated with 37.917 KHz signal at 455 KHz

Carrier frequency

FCAR = 1/TC = fOSC/12
Duty ratio = T1/TC = 1/3

ꔛ

Configuration of frame

Data code
Data code
Lead
code
Low custom code
High custom High
code custom code
Data code
Data code
Low
custom code
High custom code
Data code
Data code
Low custom code
High
code
Data
Data
Low
custom
code
Highcustom
custom
code
Datacode
code Data code
Datacode
code
Lead
code
LowLow
custom
code code
High
custom
code
Data
code
Lead
code
custom
C2
C0
C2
C5
D0
D1D5D2
D1D5D2
D4 D5
D6 D7
C2 custom
C3C0
C4C1C5
C6C3
C7C4
C0C5
C1C6
C2C7
C3
C4C1C5
C6C3
C7C4
D0
D1C6
D2C7
D3
D4code
D6D3
D7D4
D0D5
D1D6
D2D7
D3D0
D4
D6D3
D7
High
custom
code
Data
Data
code
Lead code C0 C1 Low
code
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
C0
C0C1
C1 C2
C2C3
C3C4
C4C5
C5C6
C6C7
C7C0
C0C1
C1 C2
C2C3
C3C4
C4C5
C5C6
C6C7
C7D0
D0D1
D1 D2
D2D3
D3D4
D4D5
D5D6
D6D7
D7D0
D0D1
D1 D2
D2D3
D3D4
D4D5
D5D6
D6D7
D7
C0 C1
C6C5
C7C6
C0 C7
C1 C0
C2 C3
D0C6
D1 C7
D2 D0
D3 D1
D4 D5
D2D7
D3D0
D4 D1
D5 D2
D6 D7
C1 C3
C2C4
C3C5C4
C1 C4
C2C5
C3C6
C4C7C5
D2D6
D3D7
D4D0
D5D1D6
D3 D4 D5 D6
C0 C2

Lead code
1st
frame
Lead
code
Lead code

Repeat frame
Repeat code Repeat code
Repeat code
Repeat
Repeat code
code
Repeat code

Tf
Tf
Tf
Tf
Tf

Repeat code
ꔛ

9 ms

9 ms
9 ms
99ms
ms
9 ms

ꔛ

9 ms

Repeat code

APPENDIX

ꔛ

4.5 ms

4.5 ms
4.5 ms
4.5
4.5ms
ms
4.5 ms

4.5 ms

0.55 ms
0.55 ms
0.55
0.55ms
ms
0.55 ms
9 ms

9 ms
9 ms
99ms
ms
9 ms

2.25 ms
2.25 ms
2.25
2.25ms
ms
2.25 ms

Frame

0.55 ms

2.25 ms

0.55 ms

Bit description: Tf

Bit ”0”

ꔛ

Lead code

Bit ”1”
0.56 ms
0.56 ms
9 ms
0.56 ms
0.56
0.56ms
ms
0.56 ms
1.12 ms
1.12 ms
1.12 ms
1.12
1.12ms
ms
1.12 ms

2.25 ms

0.56 ms
0.56 ms
0.56
0.56ms
ms
0.56 ms

interval: Tf

0.56 ms
2.24 ms
2.24 ms
2.24
2.24ms
ms
2.24 ms

2.24 ms

The waveform is transmitted
asTf long as a key Tf
is depressed.
Tf
Tf
Tf
Tf
Tf
Tf

Tf
Tf
Tf
Tf

0.56 ms

180

1.12 ms

0.56 ms

Tf=108
Tf=108 ms @455
KHzms @455 KHz
Tf=108 ms @455 KHz
Tf=108
Tf=108ms
ms@455
@455KHz
KHz
Tf=108 ms @455 KHz

2.24 ms

Code Function

Note

Function

Note

CH ꕌ

Remote Control Button

ꕖ

Remote Control Button

CH ꕍ

Remote Control Button

ꕗ

Remote Control Button

VOL +

Remote Control Button

ꕘ

Remote Control Button

VOL -

Remote Control Button

Discrete IR Code

Remote Control Button

(Hexa)

(TV Input Selection)
C4

POWER ON

Remote Control Button
(Power On/Off)

MUTE/DELETE

Remote Control Button

INPUT

Remote Control Button

10-19

Number 0-9

Remote Control Button

FLASHBK

Remote Control Button

FAV/MARK

Remote Control Button

BACK

Remote Control Button

AV MODE

Remote Control Button

ꕌ

Remote Control Button

ꕍ

Remote Control Button

ENTER

Remote Control Button

Q.MENU

Remote Control Button

- (Dash)/LIST

Remote Control Button

EXIT

Remote Control Button

WIDGETS

Remote Control Button

NETCAST

Remote Control Button

BLUE/(L/R SELECT) Remote Control Button

YELLOW

Remote Control Button

GREEN

Remote Control Button

RED

Remote Control Button

RATIO

Remote Control Button

SIMPLINK

Remote Control Button

ꕙ

Remote Control Button

ꕚ

Remote Control Button

ENERGY SAVING Remote Control Button

INFO

Discrete IR Code
(Only Power On)

POWER OFF

Discrete IR Code
(Only Power Off)

AV1

Discrete IR Code
(AV1 Input Selection)

AV2

COMPONENT1

Discrete IR Code
(AV2 Input Selection)
Discrete IR Code
(Component1 Input Selection)

COMPONENT2

Discrete IR Code
(Component2 Input Selection)

RGB-PC

Discrete IR Code
(RGB-PC Input Selection)

HDMI1

Discrete IR Code
(HDMI1 Input Selection)

HDMI2

Discrete IR Code
(HDMI2 Input Selection)

HDMI3

Discrete IR Code
(HDMI3 Input Selection)

HDMI4

Ratio 4:3

Discrete IR Code
(HDMI4 Input Selection)
Discrete IR Code
(Only 4:3 Mode)

Ratio 16:9

Ratio Zoom

Discrete IR Code
(Only 16:9 Mode)
Discrete IR Code

APPENDIX

ꔛ

Code

(Hexa)

(Only Zoom Mode)
DC

Remote Control Button

Use this feature depending on your models.

181

APPENDIX
EXTERNAL CONTROL THROUGH RS-232C
The RS-232C port allows you connect the RS-232C input jack to an external control device (such as
a computer or an A/V control system) to control the TV’s functions externally.
ꔛ Note:

RS-232C on this unit is intended to be used with third party RS-232C control hardware and
software.
The instructions below are provided to help with programming software or to test functionality using
telenet software.

RS-232C Setup
i.e)

RGB IN (PC)

RS-232C IN

(CONTROL&SERVICE)

/DVI IN

LAN

AUDIO IN

ꔡ

1
WIRELESS
CONTROL

VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R

AUDIO OUT

2
Y

1
AUDIO

VIDEO

AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN

(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL

Communication Parameters

Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male
No.

APPENDIX

182

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Baud rate : 9600 bps (UART)
ꔛ Data

length : 8 bits
ꔛ Parity

: None
ꔛ Stop

bit : 1 bit
ꔛ Communication

code : ASCII code
ꔛ Use

a crossed (reverse) cable.

Pin Name

ꔛ

No connection
RXD (Receive data)
TXD (Transmit data)
DTR (DTE side ready)
GND
DSR (DCE side ready)
RTS (Ready to send)
CTS (Clear to send)

No Connection
1

! NOTE
►This product has command echo back in
the RS-232C Command.

RS-232C Configurations
7-Wire Configuration
(Serial female-female NULL modem cable)

PC
TV
RXD
TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS

2
3
5
4
6
7
8

3
2
5
6
4
8
7

D-Sub 9

TXD
RXD
GND
DSR
DTR
CTS
RTS

3-Wire Configurations
(Not standard)
PC
TV

RXD
TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS

2
3
5
4
6
7
8

3
2
5
6
4
7
8

D-Sub 9

TXD
RXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS

Set ID
Use this function to specify a TV ID number.
Refer to ‘Real Data Mapping’.
OPTION

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
• Caption

OPTION

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

• Language
: Off

• Caption

• Power Indicator

: Off

• Power Indicator

• Initial Setting

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

ꔉ
ꔀ

• Set ID

• Mode Setting

: Home Use

◀

▶

1
2

ENTER

4
BACK

EXIT

Select OPTION.
Select Set ID.
Choose the desired TV ID number.
The adjustment range of Set ID is
1~ 99.

Real data mapping

ꔛ

Step 0

Step 10 (Set ID 10)

Step 15 (Set ID 15)

Step 16 (Set ID 16)

Step 99 (Set ID 99)

Step 100

APPENDIX

Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.

183

APPENDIX
Command Reference List

Transmission / Receiving Protocol
Transmission

COMMAND1

COMMAND2

DATA
(Hexadecimal)

01. Power

00 - 01

02. Input Select

► P.185

03. Aspect Ratio

► P.185

04. Screen Mute

00 - 01

05. Volume Mute

00 - 01

06. Volume
Control

00 - 64

07. Contrast

00 - 64

08. Brightness

00 - 64

09. Color

00 - 64

10. Tint

00 - 64

11. Sharpness

00 - 64

12. OSD Select

00 - 01

13. R
emote
Control Lock
Mode

00 - 01

14. Treble

00 - 64

[Command 2] : Second command to control the
set.
[Set ID] : You can adjust the set ID to choose
desired TV ID number in Setup menu.
Adjustment range is 1-99. When selecting
Set ID ‘0’, every connected the TV is controlled. Set ID is indicated as decimal
(1-99) on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0
- 0x63) on transmission /receiving protocol.
[DATA] : To transmit the command data.
Transmit the ‘FF’ data to read status of
command.
[Cr] : Carriage Return
ASCII code ‘0x0D’
[ ] : ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’
* In this model, TV will not send the status during the
standby mode.

15. Bass

00 - 64

OK Acknowledgement

16. Balance

00 - 64

17. C
olor
Temperature

00 - 64

18. ISM Method

► P.186

19. Energy Saving

► P.186

20. A
uto
j
Configuration

► P.186

22. C
hannel Add/
Del

00 - 01

23. Key

► P.187

24. Backlight

00 - 64
For Plasma TV

For LED LCD TV

[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[Command 1] : First command to control the set. (j,
k, m or x)

[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]
The TV transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving normal data. At this
time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates present status data. If the data is data write mode, it
returns the data of the PC computer.
* In this model, TV will not send the status during the
standby mode.
* Data Format
[Command 2] : Use as command.
[Set ID] : Use the small character, if set ID is 10, it will send
the ‘0’, ‘a’.
[DATA] : Use the small character, if data is 0 x ab, it will
send the ‘a’, ‘b’.
[OK] : Use the large character.
Error Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]

APPENDIX

184

21.
Channel
Tuning

COMMAND1

COMMAND2

DATA00
(Hexadecimal)

DATA01
(Hexadecimal)

physical
program
high

major
program
low

DATA02
(Hexadecimal)

DATA03
(Hexadecimal)

DATA04
(Hexadecimal)

DATA05
(Hexadecimal)

major low

minor
high

minor low

attribute

he TV transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
T
on this format when receiving abnormal data from
non-viable functions or communication errors.
Data1: Illegal Code
Data2: Not supported function
Data3: Wait more time
* In this model, TV will not send the status during the
standby mode.
* Data Format
[Command 2] : Use as command.
[Set ID] : Use the small character, if set ID is 10, it will send
the ‘0’, ‘a’.
[DATA] : Use the small character, if data is 0 x ab, it will
send the ‘a’, ‘b’.
[NG] : Use the large character

01. Power (Command: k a)

05. Volume Mute (Command: k e)

To control Power On/Off of the TV.
Transmission [k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Power Off

Data 01: Power On

Acknowledgement [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In a like manner, if other functions transmit ‘FF’ data
based on this format, Acknowledgement data feedback presents status about each function.
* Note: In this model, TV will send the Acknowledge
after power on processing completion.
There might be a time delay between command and
acknowledge.
02. Input Select (Command: x b)

To control volume mute on/off.
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on
remote control.
Transmission [k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Volume mute on (Volume off)
Data 01: Volume mute off (Volume on)
Acknowledgement [e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
06. Volume Control (Command: k f)
To adjust volume.
You can also adjust volume with the volume buttons
on remote control.

To select input source for TV.

Transmission [k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Transmission [x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: DTV (Antenna) Data 01: DTV (Cable)

Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.

Data 10: Analog (Antenna) Data 11: Analog (Cable)

Acknowledgement [f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

Data 20: AV1

Data 21: AV 2

Data 40: Component1

Data 41: Component 2

07. Contrast (Command: k g)

Data 42: Component 3 Data 60: RGB-PC

To adjust screen contrast.
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.

Data 90: HDMI1

Data 91: HDMI2

Transmission [k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 92: HDMI3

Data 93: HDMI4

Acknowledgement [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.

* Use the feature depending on your model.

Acknowledgement [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

03. Aspect Ratio (Command: k c)
To adjust the screen format.
Transmission [k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01: 4:3

Data 09: Just scan

Data 02: 16:9

Data 10: Cinema Zoom1

Data 04: Zoom
Data 06: Set by program

08. Brightness (Command: k h)
To adjust screen brightness.
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

Data 1F: Cinema Zoom16

Acknowledgement [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
04. Screen Mute (Command: k d)
To select screen mute on/off.

09. Color (Command: k i)
To adjust screen color.
You can also adjust color in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.

Data 00: Screen mute off (Picture on), Video-out Mute off

Acknowledgement [i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

Data 01: Screen mute on (Picture off)
Data 10: Video-out Mute on
Acknowledgement [d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In case of Video-out Mute on only, TV will display On
Screen Display (OSD). But, in case of screen mute
on, TV will not display On Screen Display (OSD).

10. Tint (Command: k j)
To adjust screen tint.
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.

APPENDIX

Transmission [k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Transmission [k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Red: 00 - Green: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [ j ][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

185

APPENDIX
11. Sharpness (Command: k k)
To adjust screen sharpness.
You can also adjust sharpness in the Picture menu.
Transmission [k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
12. OSD Select (Command: k l)
To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off.
Transmission [k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: OSD off

Data 01: OSD on

Acknowledgement [l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
13. Remote Control Lock Mode (Command: k m)
To lock the remote control and the front panel controls on the set.

17. Color Temperature (Command: x u)
To adjust color temperature.
You can also adjust color temperature in the Picture
menu.
Transmission [x][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Warm: 00 - Cool: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
18. ISM Method (Command: j p) (For Plasma TV)
To avoid having a fixed image remain on screen.
Transmission [ j ][p][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 02: Orbiter
Data 08: Normal

04: White Wash
20: Color Wash

Acknowledgement [p][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
19. Energy Saving (Command: j q)
To control the energy saving function.

Transmission [k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Transmission [ j ][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 00: Lock off

Data 00: Off
Data 01: Minimum
Data 02: Medium
Data 03: Maximum
Data 04: Auto/Intelligent Sensor (depending on model)
Data 05: Screen off

Data 01: Lock on

Acknowledgement [m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
If you’re not using the remote control and front panel
controls on the TV, use this mode. When main power
is on/off, remote control lock is released.
If Key Lock is on in the standby mode, TV will not turn
on by POWER button of remote control and on the TV.
14. Treble (Command: k r)
To adjust treble.
You can also adjust treble in the Audio menu.
Transmission [k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
15. Bass (Command: k s)
To adjust bass.
You can also adjust bass in the Audio menu.
Transmission [k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)

APPENDIX

*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
16. Balance (Command: k t)
To adjust balance.
You can also adjust balance in the Audio menu.
Transmission [k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

Acknowledgement [q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
20. Auto Configuration (Command: j u)
To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking automatically. Auto configuration only works in
RGB-PC mode.
Transmission [ j ][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01: To set
Acknowledgement [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
21. Channel Tuning (Command: m a)
To tune channel to following physical/major/minor number.
Transmission [m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data00][ ][Data01]
[ ][Data02][ ][Data03][ ][Data04][ ][Data05][Cr]
Digital channels have a Physical, Major, and Minor
channel number. The Physical number is the actual
digital channel number, the Major is the number that
the channel should be mapped to, and the Minor is
the sub-channel. Since the ATSC tuner automatically
maps the channel to the Major number, the Physical
number is not required when sending a command.
Data 00: Physical Channel Number
NTSC air: 02 - 45, NTSC cable: 01, 0E - 7D
ATSC air: 01 - 45, ATSC cable: 01 - 87
Data 01 & 02: Major Channel Number
Data 01: High byte

Data 02: Low byte

T
wo bytes are available for the Major and Minor,
normally only the second byte is used.
Data 03 & 04: Minor Channel Number
Not needed for NTSC.

186

Data5: 7

Main/Sub
Picture

Two/One Part
Channel

Using Physical
Channel

0 Main

0 Two

0 Use

1 Sub

1 One

1 No Use

4
Reserved

Step

NTSC Air

NTSC Cable

ATSC Air

ATSC Cable_std

ATSC Cable_hrc

ATSC Cable_irc

ATSC cable_auto

Reserved

...

Reserved

The table above lists the binary code which must be
converted to Hexadecimal before sending. For example: The binary code to tune the sub source to an
NTSC cable channel is “1000 0001”, which translates
to “81” in Hex.
* 7th bit : For which source do you want to change the
channel.
*6
th bit: Use a two part or one part channel. Most
cases just use 0 since it’s ignored when using
NTSC.
*5
th bit: Use 0 with NTSC since it can only use the
physical channel number. Normally use 1 for ATSC
since most times it doesn’t matter what the physical
number is.

22. Channel Add/Del (Command: m b)
To add and delete the channels.
Transmission [m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Channel Delete Data 01: Channel Add
Acknowledgement [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
23. Key (Command: m c)
To send IR remote control code.
Transmission [m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
See page 181.
Acknowledgement [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

* 4th bit: Set to 0.
* 3-0 bits: Choose signal type.

24. Backlight (Command: m g) (For LED LCD TV)
To adjust screen backlight.

*Tune Command Examples:
1. Tune to the analog (NTSC) cable channel 35.

Transmission [m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min:00 ~ Max:64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)

Data 00 = Physical of 35 = 23

*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.

Data 01 & 02 = No Major = 00 00

Acknowledgement [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

Data 03 & 04 = No Minor = 00 00
Data 05 = 0000 0001 in binary = 01
2. Tune to the digital local channel 30-3.
Data 00 = Don’t know Physical = 00
Data 01 & 02 = Major is 30 = 00 1E
Data 03 & 04 = Minor is 3 = 00 03

APPENDIX

Total = ma 00 23 00 00 00 00 01

Data 05 = 0010 0010 in binary = 22
Total = ma 00 00 00 1E 00 03 22
Acknowledgement[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data00]
[Data01] [Data02][Data03][Data04][x][a][ ][Set ID][ ]
[NG][Data00][x]

187

APPENDIX
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51
Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the
software is free for all its users. This General Public License
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software
and to any other program whose authors commit to using
it. (Some other free software foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.)
You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that
you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.

APPENDIX

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the
software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent
this, we have made it clear that any patent must be

188

licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0. This license applies to any program or other work which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying
it may be distributed under the terms of this General
Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such
program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this license; they are outside its
scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted,
and the output from the program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the program (independent of having been made by running the program).
Whether that is true depends on what the program
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
program's source code as you receive it, in any medium,
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that
refer to this license and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the program a copy of
this license along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the program or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) Y
ou must cause the modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.

b) Y
ou must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part there of, to be licensed
as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this license.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that
there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user
how to view a copy of this license. (Exception: if the
Program itself is interactive but does not normally
print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this license, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this license,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the program with the Program (or with a work
based on the program) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this license.

The source code for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source
code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However,
as a special exception, the source code distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating
system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by
offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from
the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to
copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the
Program except as expressly provided under this license.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or
distribute the Program is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this license. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this license will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this license, since you
have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Program or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this license. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the program (or any work based on the
program), you indicate your acceptance of this license
to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the program or works based
on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the program (or any work
based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties to this license.

APPENDIX

3. You may copy and distribute the program (or a work
based on it, under section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed
under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,

c) A
ccompany it with the information you received as to
the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial
distribution and only if you received the program in
object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)

189

APPENDIX

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this license, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this license. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this license and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy
both it and this license would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose
that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what
is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
license.

APPENDIX

8. If the distribution and/or use of the program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the program under this license may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
license incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this license.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the General Public License from time
to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If

190

the program specifies a version number of this license
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the program does not specify a
version number of this license, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the program into
other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting
the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
"AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY
AND
FITNESS
FOR
A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO
MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to apply these terms to your new programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to
most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each
file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer
to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of
what it does.
Copyright (C)
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/
or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2 of the license, or (at your option) any later
version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General
Public License along with this program; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth
Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice
like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;
for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are
welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type
‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should
show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items-whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers)
written by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating
your program into proprietary programs. If your program is
a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to
permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If
this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this license.

APPENDIX

191

APPENDIX

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999

Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51
Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also
counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software - to make sure
the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to
some specially designated software packages - typically
libraries - of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we
suggest you first think carefully about whether this license
or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service
if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it; that you can change the software and use pieces
of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that
you can do these things.

APPENDIX

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library
or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights
that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And
you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

192

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear

that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the
original version, so that the original author's reputation will
not be affected by problems that might be introduced by
others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent
holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained
for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by
the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the
GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically
or using a shared library, the combination of the two is
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore
permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the
library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License
because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than
the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other
free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the
reason we use the ordinary General Public License for
many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special
need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain
library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve
this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library.
A more frequent case is that a free library does the same
job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is
little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only,
so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in nonfree programs enables a greater number of people to use
a large body of free software. For example, permission to
use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as
well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and
the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work
that uses the library". The former contains code derived
from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with
the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0. This license agreement applies to any software library or
other program which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may
be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General
Public License (also called “this license”). Each license
is addressed as "you".
A “library” means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or
work which has been distributed under these terms. A
“work based on the Library” means either the Library or
any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a
work containing the library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the library.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
library's complete source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed
at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this license.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function
or a table of data to be supplied by an application
program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you
must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the
event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square
roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d
requires that any application-supplied function or table
used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still
compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this license, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
whole which is a work based on the library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this license,
whose permissions for other licenses extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the library.

APPENDIX

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this license; they are outside its
scope. The act of running a program using the Library
is not restricted, and output from such a program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the library (independent of the use of the Library in a
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what
the library does and what the program that uses the
library does.

notices that refer to this license and to the absence of
any warranty; and distribute a copy of this license along
with the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
on the library with the library (or with a work based on
the library) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope
of this license.

193

APPENDIX

3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU
General Public License instead of this License to a given
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the
notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the
ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of
the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared,
then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do
not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public
License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative
works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the
code of the library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the library (or a portion or
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to
copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of
the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by
being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that
uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside
the scope of this license.
However, linking a “work that uses the library” with the
Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the
Library (because it contains portions of the library),
rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable
is therefore covered by this license. Section 6 states
terms for distribution of such executable.

APPENDIX

When a “work that uses the library” uses material from
a header file that is part of the library, the object code
for the work may be a derivative work of the library even
though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely
defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessories, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executable containing this object code plus portions of

194

the library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the library, you
may distribute the object code for the work under the
terms of Section 6. Any executable containing that work
also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked
directly with the library itself.
6. As an exception to the sections above, you may also
combine or link a "work that uses the library" with the
library to produce a work containing portions of the
library, and distribute that work under terms of your
choice, provided that the terms permit modification of
the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this license. You must supply a
copy of this license. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright
notice for the library among them, as well as a reference
directing the user to the copy of this license. Also, you
must do one of these things:
a) A
ccompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the library
including whatever changes were used in the work
(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2
above); and, if the work is an executable linked with
the Library, with the complete machine-readable
“work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or
source code, so that the user can modify the library
and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files
in the library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking
with the library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1)
uses at run time a copy of the library already present
on the user’s computer system, rather than copying
library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the
user installs one, as long as the modified version is
interface-compatible with the version that the work
was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent
access to copy the above specified materials from
the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user
a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless
that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do
not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on
the library side-by-side in a single library together with
other library facilities not covered by this license, and
distribute such a combined library, provided that the
separate distribution of the work based on the Library
and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,
and provided that you do these two things:
a) A
ccompany the combined library with a copy of the
same work based on the Library, uncombined with
any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of
the fact that part of it is a work based on the library,
and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the library except as expressly provided under
this license. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the library is void, and
will automatically terminate your rights under this
license. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this license will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in
full compliance.

10. Each time you redistribute the library (or any work based
on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link
with or modify the library subject to these terms and
conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this license, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this license. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this license and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the library at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the library
by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it
and this license would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply, and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a license cannot impose
that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what
is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
license.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the library is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the
library under this license may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
not thus excluded. In such case, this license incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this license.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the Lesser General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
the library specifies a version number of this license
which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation.

APPENDIX

9. You are not required to accept this license, since you
have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the library or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this license. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the library (or any work based on the
library), you indicate your acceptance of this license to do
so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the library or works based on it.

You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties with this license.

195

APPENDIX

If the library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the library into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software
and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK
AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

APPENDIX

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO
MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to apply these terms to your new libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making

196

it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
You can do so by permitting redistribution under these
terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary
General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the
library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line
and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what
it does.
Copyright (C)
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General
Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2.1 of the license, or (at your
option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser
General Public License along with this library; if not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth
Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James
Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice

MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1

--------------1.Definitions.
1.0.1. “Commercial use” means distribution or otherwise
making the covered code available to a third party.
1.1.

“Contributor” means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of modifications.

1.2.

“Contributor version” means the combination of the
original code, prior modifications used by a contributor, and the modifications made by that particular
contributor.

1.3.

“Covered code” means the original code or modifications or the combination of the original code and
modifications, in each case including portions thereof.

1.4.

“Electronic distribution mechanism” means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data.

which, at the time of its release under this license is
not already covered code governed by this license.
1.10.1. “Patent claims” means any patent claim(s), now
owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any
patent licensable by grantor.
1.11.

“Source code” means the preferred form of the covered code for making modifications to it, including all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, scripts used to control compilation
and installation of an executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the original code
or another well known, available covered code of the
contributor's choice. The source code can be in a
compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.

1.5.

“Executable” means covered code in any form other
than source code.

1.6.

“Initial developer” means the individual or entity
identified as the initial Developer in the Source Code
notice required by exhibit A.

1.7.

“Larger work” means a work which combines covered
code or portions thereof with code not governed by
the terms of this License.

1.12. “You” (or “Your”) means an individual or a legal
entity exercising rights under, and complying with all
of the terms of, this license or a future version of this
license issued under section 6.1.
For legal entities, “You” includes any entity which
controls, is controlled by, or is under common control
with You. For purposes of this definition, “control”
means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than
fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.

1.8.

“License” means this document.

2. Source Code License.

1.8.1. “Licensable” means having the right to grant, to the
maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the
initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of
the rights conveyed herein.
“Modifications” means any addition to or deletion
from the substance or structure of either the original
code or any previous modifications. When covered
code is released as a series of files, a modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a
file containing original code or previous modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the original
code or previous modifications.

The initial developer grant.
The initial developer hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third
party intellectual property claims:
a) u
nder intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) licensable by initial developer to
use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the original code (or portions
thereof) with or without modifications, and/or as
part of a larger work; and
(b) under patents claims infringed by the making,
using or selling of original code, to make, have
made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/
or otherwise dispose of the original code (or portions there of).

APPENDIX

1.9.

2.1.

1.10. “Original code” means source code of computer
software code which is described in the source code
notice required by exhibit as original code, and

197

APPENDIX

(c) the licenses granted in this section 2.1(a) and (b)
are effective on the date Initial developer first
distributes original code under the terms of this
license.
(d) Notwithstanding section 2.1(b) above, no patent
license is granted: 1) for code that You delete
from the original Code; 2) separate from the
original code; or 3) for infringements caused by:
i) the modification of the original code or ii) the
combination of the original code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims,
each contributor hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free, non-exclusive license

APPENDIX

198

(a) u
nder intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) licensable by contributor, to
use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the modifications created by
such contributor (or portions thereof) either on
an unmodified basis, with other modifications, as
covered code and/or as part of a larger work; and
(b) under patent claims infringed by the making,
using, or selling of modifications made by that
contributor either alone and/or in combination
with its contributor version (or portions of such
combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale,
have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) modifications made by that contributor (or portions
thereof); and 2) the combination of modifications
made by that contributor with its contributor version (or portions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b)
are effective on the date contributor first makes
commercial use of the covered code.
(d) Notwithstanding section 2.2(b) above, no patent
license is granted: 1) for any code that contributor
has deleted from the contributor version; 2)
separate from the contributor version; 3) for
infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of contributor version or ii) the combination
of modifications made by that contributor with
other software (except as part of the contributor
version) or other devices; or 4) under patent
claims infringed by covered code in the absence
of modifications made by that contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1.

Application of license.
The modifications which You create or to which you
contribute are governed by the terms of this license,
including without limitation section 2.2. The source
code version of covered code may be distributed
only under the terms of this license or a future version of this license released under section 6.1, and
you must include a copy of this license with every
copy of the source code you distribute. You may not

offer or impose any terms on any source code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of
this license or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, you may include an additional document
offering the additional rights described in section
3.5.
3.2. Availability of source code.
Any modification which you create or to which you
contribute must be made available in source code
form under the terms of this license either on the
same media as an executable version or via an
accepted electronic distribution mechanism to anyone to whom you made an executable version available; and if made available via electronic distribution
mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve
(12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent
version of that particular modification has been
made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the source code version remains
available even if the electronic distribution mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of modifications.
You must cause all covered code to which you contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You
made to create that covered code and the date of any
change. You must include a prominent statement that
the modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from
original code provided by the initial developer and
including the name of the initial developer in (a) the
source code, and (b) in any notice in an executable
version or related documentation in which you describe
the origin or ownership of the covered code.
3.4.

Intellectual property matters
(a) Third party claims.
If contributor has knowledge that a license under a
third party's intellectual property rights is required to
exercise the rights granted by such contributor under
sections 2.1 or 2.2, contributor must include a text file
with the source code distribution titled "LEGAL"
which describes the claim and the party making the
claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know
whom to contact. If contributor obtains such knowledge after the modification is made available as
described in section 3.2, contributor shall promptly
modify the LEGAL file in all copies contributor makes
available thereafter and shall take other steps (such
as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups)
reasonably calculated to inform those who received
the covered code that new knowledge has been
obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If contributor's modifications include an application
programming interface and contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, contributor must also
include this information in the LEGAL file.

(c) Representations.
contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to section 3.4(a) above, contributor believes that
contributor's modifications are contributor's original
creation(s) and/or contributor has sufficient rights to
grant the rights conveyed by this license.
3.5. Required notices.
You must duplicate the notice in exhibit A in each file
of the source code. If it is not possible to put such
notice in a particular source code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location
(such as a relevant directory) where a user would be
likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or
more modification(s), you may add your name as a
contributor to the notice described in exhibit A. you
must also duplicate this license in any documentation for the source code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to covered
code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee
for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of covered code.
However, you may do so only on your own behalf, and
not on behalf of the Initial developer or any contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such
warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is
offered by you alone, and You hereby agree to
indemnify the Initial developer and every contributor
for any liability incurred by the Initial developer or
such contributor as a result of warranty, support,
indemnity or liability terms you offer.

3.7.

Larger works.
You may create a larger work by combining covered

4. Inability to comply due to statute or regulation.
If it is impossible for you to comply with any of the
terms of this license with respect to some or all of
the covered code due to statute, judicial order, or
regulation then you must: (a) comply with the terms
of this license to the maximum extent possible; and
(b) describe the limitations and the code they affect.
Such description must be included in the LEGAL file
described in section 3.4 and must be included with
all distributions of the source code. Except to the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such
description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.
5. Application of this license.
This license applies to code to which the initial developer has attached the notice in exhibit A and to
related covered code.
6. Versions of the license.
6.1.

New versions.
Netscape communications corporation (“Netscape”)
may publish revised and/or new versions of the
license from time to time. Each version will be given
a distinguishing version number.

6.2. Effect of new versions.
Once covered code has been published under a
particular version of the license, you may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You
may also choose to use such covered code under
the terms of any subsequent version of the license
published by netscape. No one other than netscape
has the right to modify the terms applicable to covered code created under this license.
6.3. Derivative works.
If You create or use a modified version of this license
(which you may only do in order to apply it to code
which is not already covered code governed by this
license), You must (a) rename Your license so that the
phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL",
"Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar
phrase do not appear in your license (except to note
that your license differs from this license) and (b)
otherwise make it clear that Your version of the
license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla
Public license and netscape Public License. (Filling in
the name of the initial developer, original code or
contributor in the notice described in exhibit A shall
not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of
this license.)

APPENDIX

3.6. Distribution of executable versions.
You may distribute covered code in executable form
only if the requirements of section 3.1-3.5 have been
met for that covered code, and if you include a notice
stating that the source code version of the covered
code is available under the terms of this license,
including a description of how and where you have
fulfilled the obligations of section 3.2. The notice
must be conspicuously included in any notice in an
executable version, related documentation or collateral in which you describe recipients' rights relating
to the covered code. You may distribute the executable version of covered code or ownership rights
under a license of your choice, which may contain
terms different from this license, provided that you
are in compliance with the terms of this license and
that the license for the executable version does not
attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the
source code version from the rights set forth in this
license. If you distribute the executable version under
a different license you must make it absolutely clear
that any terms which differ from this license are
offered by you alone, not by the Initial developer or
any contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the
initial developer and every contributor for any liability
incurred by the initial developer or such contributor
as a result of any such terms You offer.

code with other code not governed by the terms of
this license and distribute the larger work as a single
product. In such a case, you must make sure the
requirements of this license are fulfilled for the covered code.

199

APPENDIX

7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE
OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE
DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE
INITIAL
DEVELOPER
OR
ANY
OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES
AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE
OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1.

This license and the rights granted hereunder will
terminate automatically if you fail to comply with
terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30
days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the covered code which are properly
granted shall survive any termination of this license.
Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in
effect beyond the termination of this license shall
survive.

8.2. If you initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions)
against initial developer or a contributor (the initial
developer or contributor against whom you file such
action is referred to as “Participant”) alleging that:

APPENDIX

200

(a) s uch participant's contributor version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all
rights granted by such participant to you under
sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this license shall, upon
60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of
notice you either: (i) agree in writing to pay participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for
your past and future use of modifications made
by such participant, or (ii) withdraw your litigation
claim with respect to the contributor version
against such participant. If within 60 days of notice,
a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement
are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the
parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the
rights granted by participant to you under sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the
expiration of the 60 day notice period specified
above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such
participant's contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights grant-

ed to You by such participant under sections
2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the
date you first made, used, sold, distributed, or
had made, modifications made by that participant.
8.3. If you assert a patent infringement claim against
participant alleging that such participant's contributor version directly or indirectly infringes any patent
where such claim is resolved (such as by license or
settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the
licenses granted by such participant under sections
2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining
the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under sections 8.1 or 8.2
above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly
granted by you or any distributor hereunder prior to
termination shall survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE,
SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF
COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF
SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE,
COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY
AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL
NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR
PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH
PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT
APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION
AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The covered code is a "commercial item," as that
term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all
U.S. Government end users acquire covered code
with only those rights set forth herein.

11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This license represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this
license is held to be unenforceable, such provision
shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to
make it enforceable. This License shall be governed
by California law provisions (except to the extent
applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding
its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an
entity chartered or registered to do business in the
united states of america, any litigation relating to this
License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the
federal courts of the northern district of california,
with venue lying in santa clara county, california, with
the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys'
fees and expenses. The application of the united
nations convention on contracts for the International
sale of goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract
shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply
to this license.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between initial developer and the contributors,
each party is responsible for claims and damages
arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of
rights under this license and you agree to work with
initial developer and contributors to distribute such
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is
intended or shall be deemed to constitute any
admission of liability.

The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public
License Version 1.1 (the “license”); you may not use this file
except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a
copy of the license at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the license is distributed on an
"AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is ______________________________________
.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code
is___________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright
(C) _______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under
the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the provisions of [______] license are applicable
instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only under the terms of the [____] license
and not to allow others to use your version of this file under
the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions
above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] license. If you do not delete the
provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file
under either the MPL or the [___] license."
NOTE: The text of this exhibit A may differ slightly from the
text of the notices in the source code files of the original
code. You should use the text of this exhibit A rather than
the text found in the original code/source code for Your
modifications.

APPENDIX

13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial developer may designate portions of the covered code as "Multiple-Licensed". "MultipleLicensed" means that the initial developer permits
you to utilize portions of the covered code under your
choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any,
specified by the initial developer in the file described
in exhibit A.

EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.

201

OWNER’S MANUAL

LED LCD TV / PLASMA TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.

The model and serial number of the TV is located
on the back and one side of the TV.
Record it below should you ever need service.

LED LCD TV MODELS
47LX9500
55LX9500
47LEX8
55LEX8
60LEX9
72LEX9

PLASMA TV MODELS
50PK950
60PK950

MODEL
SERIAL

P/NO : SAC34134205 (1004-REV01)

www.lg.com

NETCAST
NETCAST
YAHOO! TV WIDGETS
You can enjoy the best of the Internet in perfect harmony with the simplicity and reliability of your TV.
Yahoo! TV Widgets provide an integrated Internet TV experience powered by the Yahoo!® Connected
TV platform. You can monitor financial stocks, share photos with friends and family, track news and
weather and much more, all through the Yahoo! TV Widgets service on your TV.
Note that these services are provided by the Content Provider, using Yahoo! Widget Platform provided
by Yahoo!. All the services are dependent on appropriate Content Provider. Please check about page
of each widgets for Terms of service.
Note If you have any question or need any help for the widgets which is not covered in this manual,
please contact web site for further help which shall be listed in about page of each widget, or Yahoo!
help site http://conntectedtv.yahoo.com/help.

What is a TV Widget?
A TV Widget is an Internet application designed to run on your TV.

NETCAST

What is a Snippet?
A Snippet is a shortcut used to open a TV Widget, as a dynamic bookmark to TV Widget content.

Using the Remote Control
When Yahoo! TV Widgets are displayed, you can use the following remote control buttons.

WIDGETS

BACK

Begin using Yahoo! TV Widgets. Press
it again to go back to just watching TV.

ENTER

Select the focused item.

Highlight and focus on buttons in the
Yahoo! TV Widgets user interface.

Go to the TV Menu.

Move the focus selection up.

RED

Close the open widget and return to
watching TV.

Move the focus selection down.

GREEN

Change the open widget’s settings.

Move the focus selection to the left.

YELLOW

Add, move, or delete your snippets.

Move the focus selection to the right.

BLUE

Resize the video to fit onscreen, or to
make it fullscreen.

Return to the previous menu.

EXIT

Return to TV viewing.

Getting Started Out of the Box
Once your television is powered up and your network is operational, the Yahoo! TV Widgets software
guides you through its step-by-step on-screen wizard the first time you startup. These setup steps are
designed to provide you with the information and settings you’ll need to start using the Yahoo! TV
Widgets user interface.

Guided Setup
WIDGETS

ENTER

Select Let’s get started!. If you select
Exit Setup now, this step will be
resumed the next time you press
WIDGETS.

Choosing your country allows the use of
localized content.

Accepting Yahoo! Terms of Service is also
required to use Yahoo! TV Widgets.

ENTER

Enter your name to setup your profile.

Navigate to your location.

ENTER

Select your country.

Accepting the Yahoo! Privacy Policy is required
to use Yahoo! Widgets.

ENTER

Select Ok, I accept.

ENTER

Select letters and spell your
name.

ENTER

Select Save this name and
create your profile.

NETCAST

Activate Yahoo! TV Widgets. The first time you use Yahoo! TV Widgets the step-by-step
wizard begins with the Welcome Screen.

Test your network connection. After setup is
completed, a tutorial on how to use Yahoo! TV
Widgets will come up next.

ENTER

Select Continue and review the tutorial.
Select Exit setup to start using Yahoo!
Widgets now.

NETCAST

Using Yahoo! TV Widgets
WIDGETS

Activate Yahoo! TV Widgets.
ꔛ The horizontal list at the bottom of your TV
screen is called “the dock”.
ꔛ The items in this list are called “snippets”.
ꔛ A snippet is a shortcut which opens a TV
Widget.

Move between snippets.
Focus is located in the leftmost region (highlighted in dark red).
ꔛ The dock scrolls snippets under this focal
point.
ꔛ

NETCAST
ENTER

Open the Sidebar when the TV Widget snippet
is in focus.
ꔛ The Home button including the main logo is
at the top of the sidebar.
Navigate a menu item.
ꔛ The currently focused button is the one highlighted in dark red.

ENTER

Select the focused button.

The sidebar’s bottom toolbar includes four colorcoded buttons.

RED

GREEN

Close the sidebar and return to
watching TV.
Change the widget’s settings.

YELLOW

BLUE

Add or delete a snippet.
Resize video to fit onscreen, or to
make it fullscreen.

Using the Profile Widget
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

NETCAST

ꔛ

The Profile Widget configures your user profile.
You can set up multiple profiles for multiple users.
Each profile maintains its own list of TV Widgets.
The Switch Profile menu allows you to switch to a different user profile.
The Profile Settings menu allows you to customize your profile, create
a profile PIN, or limit the installation of widgets.
The System Settings menu allows you to change your Location,
Repeat the Tutorial, and Restore Factory Settings.
Restore Factory Settings will erase all profiles and widgets installed
by users, and restore the original configuration. (See also NetCast
➜ Setup ➜ Service maintenance ➜ Restore Yahoo! Factory
Settings)
The Administrative Controls menu allows you to set the Screen
Saver timeout, create the Owner PIN, and to Create a Profile.
The Sign in to Yahoo! menu allows you to personalize your experience
using your Yahoo! ID.
If you don’t have a Yahoo! ID yet, please visit http://www.yahoo.com
to create one.

Using the Widget Gallery
ꔛ

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

The Widget Gallery allows you to browse and discover new TV
Widgets.
The featured TV Widgets are highlighted in the display case at the
top of the sidebar.
You can also browse available TV Widgets by category.
To install a widget, select Add Widget to My Profile and press the
ENTER button.
The Owner PIN is needed to install widgets for profiles that have
been protected through the Limit Profile indicator under Profile
Widget
Profile Settings.
Go to the Profile Widget
Administrative Controls menu to set or
change the Owner PIN.
The maximum number of Widget which can be installed is 10.
You can delete the Widget by pressing the RED button after
YELLOW button in Dock setting.

NETCAST
Using the Yahoo! News Widget
ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ

NETCAST

Using the Yahoo! Weather Widget
ꔛ

ꔛ
ꔛ

ꔛ

The Yahoo! News Widget provides the latest headline news for
business, entertainment, politics, sports, top stories, and many
other categories.
Select a category, press ENTER.
Select a headline within the category, press ENTER.
View the dynamically updated news summary for the selected
headline.

The Yahoo! Weather Widget provides updates on your local and
favorite weather locations with content that dynamically changes
with weather conditions.
Press the GREEN button to display the Settings menu.
From the Settings menu you can add or remove a city for which
you want to view weather information.
- Add a New City by entering the name of the city.
Once the search results are displayed, select the city you want
and press ENTER button.
-D
elete a City by selecting the city you want to delete from the
city list. Press ENTER button and confirm the deletion.
- Select the Display Units As button to change the temperature
indication mode to Imperial or Metric. Imperial will show temperatures in Fahrenheit and Metric will use Celsius.
To create a snippet for a favorite city:
- Select the city from the home page and view the detailed
weather information.
- Press the YELLOW button.
- Select the Add Snippet button and press ENTER to add the
city as a snippet.
To delete a snippet for a city:
- Navigate to the snippet and press ENTER button to start the
widget. The detailed page for the snippet’s city will be displayed.
- Press the YELLOW button.
- Select the Delete Snippet button and press ENTER button to
remove the snippet.

Using the Yahoo! Finance Widget
ꔛ

ꔛ

NETCAST

ꔛ

View stock information and the latest stock news with the Yahoo!
Finance Widget.
Press the GREEN button to set up your stocks.
- Use the Add New Symbol menu to enter the name of a new
stock.
- Select the stock you want to add from the search results and
select the Add Symbol button and press ENTER button.
- The selected stock is added to the My Stocks list.
- The Import Symbols From Yahoo! menu retrieves the stocks
from your Yahoo! Finance portfolio.
- The Merge Symbols button merges the symbols in the Yahoo!
Finance Widget with the symbols from your portfolio.
- The Replace Symbols button deletes the symbols in the Yahoo!
Finance Widget and replaces them with the symbols from your
portfolio.
- The Display Format button changes the stock-price fluctuation transition to Value or Percentage.
To create a snippet for a favorite stock:
- Select the stock symbol from the home page and view the
detailed finance information.
- Press the YELLOW button.
- Select the Add Snippet button and press ENTER button to add
the stock as a snippet.
To delete a snippet:
- Navigate to the snippet and press ENTER button to start widget. The detailed page for the snippet’s stock will be displayed.
- Press the YELLOW button.
- Select the Delete Snippet button and press ENTER button to
remove the snippet.

NETCAST
Using the flickr Widget
ꔛ

ꔛ

NETCAST

ꔛ

The flickr Widget provides a television-viewing experience
while watching slideshows of family and friends’ photos.
Personalize the flickr Widget by logging in with your
Yahoo! ID. Refer to Using the Profile Widget for instructions.
The Your Photos menu shows photos you have registered
with the flickr website.
The Your Sets menu allows you to view photos you have
classified in flickr.
The Explore menu allows you to explore photos featured
by the flickr website.
The Mark as Favorite moves photos to your Favorite
Photos set.
The Favorite Photos menu allows you to see the photos
you have classified as favorites.
The Your Contacts menu allows you to see updates from
family and friends.
The Your Groups menu allows you to select your favorite
groups from the flickr website http://www.flickr.com to
share and enjoy photos with the flickr community of
users.
To view photos in a slideshow:
- Select a thumbnail of a photo and press ENTER button
to view the photo’s details.
- Select Start Slideshow and press ENTER button.
To control the slideshow display:
- Press ENTER button during a slideshow.
- The thumbnails of photos are displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
- When the slideshow control is displayed, you can Pause,
Play, and Stop the slideshow.
- If you select the INFO button and press ENTER button,
you can view details for the selected photo.
To configure the Settings, press the GREEN button.
- The Time Per Slide button controls the speed of the
slideshow.
- The Repeat button will restart the slideshow at the
beginning after the last photo is shown.

Restore Yahoo! Factory Settings
Restoring Yahoo! Factory Settings will delete all of your profiles and installed widgets.
Setup

Setup

Weather Effect

Restore Yahoo! Factory Settings

Service Maintenance

Netflix Deactivation

? Do you want to restore Yahoo! factory setting?
This will deleted all the profiles and widgets you have
installed.

Vudu Deactivation
Close
OK

Cancel

Display NetCast menu.

RED

3
4
5

NETCAST

Select Setup option.

ENTER

Select Service Maintenance.

ENTER

Select Restore Yahoo! Factory Settings.

ENTER

Select OK to restore Yahoo! factory settings.
This TV will restore Yahoo! factory settings.

Troubleshooting
Yahoo! TV Widgets Problems
Misc.-Caption,
Language displayed
within Widget

Did the customer
change Menu language but Widget
did not change its
language.

ꔛ
ꔛ

Some Widgets do not fully support TV Menu options.
The help site for individual widget can be found in the settings
panel of each widget by pressing the GREEN button on your
remote after opening that widget from the Dock.

NETCAST
Yahoo! TV Widgets Problems
Failed to launch Yahoo! TV Widgets

Was the customer
watching HDMI
input?
Was the customer
watching My Media?

ꔛ

To use Yahoo! TV Widgets while using the HDMI input, turn off
“Simplink-on” in the OPTION menu. Or change to another Input
and press then press the WIDGETS button.

ꔛ

The WIDGETS button is blocked when using MY MEDIA.
Exit MY MEDIA by pressing the NETCAST button and then select
Yahoo!

ꔛ

Nothing happens
when pressing
WIDGETS button

NETCAST

Is “Loading” message displayed?
Check IP Address
setting is OK?
Failed to open some widgets

Is Connection
Unavailable icon (yellow triangle) displayed on snippet?

ꔛ

Make sure the TV can connect to the internet.

ꔛ

If connection unavailable icon is displayed, the server may under

maintenance or unreachable for other reasons. Try again later or
visit the Yahoo! help site. http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/help

ꔛ

Some Widgets work
properly while others
do not.
ꔛ

If the “Loading” message does not go away after a reasonable

amount of time, delete that widget and re-install it.

ꔛ

If it stops in Loading

Turn off the TV and then turn it back on. Press the NETCAST
button and then the RED button. Select “Restore Yahoo! Factory
Settings” to restore the Yahoo! Factory Settings.
For more help, visit the Yahoo! help site: http://connectedtv.yahoo.
com/help.

ꔛ

Try again later.
Try re-installing the Widget. Delete that widget by pressing the
Yellow button when it's highlighted in the dock. Then press the
Red button twice to delete that widget. Then open the Widget
Gallery and browse to find that widget and select “Add Widget to
My Profile” to install that widget and then try again.
If problem still exists, restore Yahoo! factory settings by pressing
NETCAST button and RED button on your remote control.
Perform Restore Yahoo! Factory Settings.

Yahoo! TV Widgets Problems

Check IP Address
setting is OK?
Press RED or
WIDGETS button on
remote control.

ꔛ

The error may only be temporary. Exit out and try again.

ꔛ

If not, connect Network Cable properly and set IP address from
Network menu and try again or contact Internet service provider.

ꔛ

Exits Yahoo! TV Widgets by pressing RED button on your remote
and re-enter by WIDGETS button.

ꔛ

Exits Yahoo! TV Widgets by pressing NETCAST button and enter

ꔛ

Press NETCAST button.
ꔛ

Gallery - Unable to install
widget from gallery

Check IP Address
setting is OK?
Is Lock Icon on right
side of “Add Widget
to My Profile”?
“Install completed”
but it never worked.

Flickr - “We could not find
anything to display” message displayed

Is connection
unavailable icon
(yellow triangle)
displayed?

Did you sign-in
Yahoo! account?

ꔛ

NETFLIX temporarily, and re-enter Yahoo! Widgets by pressing
NETCAST button and select Yahoo!
If the problem still exists, re-install the Widget. Press the Yellow
button with the Widget highlighted in the Dock. Press the Red
button twice to delete that widget. Now open the Widget Gallery
and browse to find that widget and select “Add Widget to My
Profile” to install that widget and then try again.
If the problem still exists for all widgets, restore the Yahoo! Factory
settings by pressing the NETCAST button and the RED button on
your remote control. Select “Restore Yahoo! Factory Settings” to
reset.

NETCAST

Widget is stuck if the remote control button is pressed.

Press BACK button
and try again later.

If not, connect Network Cable properly and set IP address from

menu-Option and try again or contact Internet service provider.
ꔛ

Need Owner PIN to install. If you forgot Owner PIN, contact Yahoo!

for further help. http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/help
ꔛ

Try to re-start Yahoo! TV Widgets after you enter YouTube and exit

ꔛ

from YouTube.
Or Delete it and re-install it.

ꔛ

If yes, check network settings or contact internet service provider,
or try later.

ꔛ

If yes, you need to upload your photos to Flickr site to display.
If not, try again later. The Flickr server may be under maintenance, or contact service provider.

ꔛ

NETCAST
NETFLIX
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.

Activating the TV
You can instantly watch movies (quite a few new releases) & TV episodes from Netflix streamed over
the internet to your TV.
To become a Netflix member visit: www.netflix.com/LG
Activating your TV establishes a connection between your TV and your Netflix account. You must activate your TV before you can use it to watch movies streamed over the INTERNET from Netflix.
If newer software is needed, a software update screen will automatically appear.
Note that this service is provided by the Content Provider, Netflix. It is dependent on Netflix to provide the data.

1
NETCAST

no-start my FREE trial: If you have no
account, visit http://www.netflix.com/LG on
your computer.

ꔛ

Select NETFLIX.

ENTER

Select yes-activate instant
streaming from Netflix if you
have an existing account.

Visit the Netflix website on your computer:
www.netflix.com/activate
Enter your Sign in Name and Password to log
into your account.

See the activation code on your TV screen,

Activation Code

NETCAST

Enter this activation code to the Netflix Website
and click Activate.

Wait for the poster screen to appear on your
TV.

You’re ready to add movies to your instant
Queue.

NETCAST
Netflix ESN (Electronic Serial Number)
We provide you the Netflix ESN (Electronic Serial Number) that allows you to watch videos using the
Netflix website.
For more information, please visit: www.netflix.com
NETWORK

ꔂ Move

ꔉ Enter

NETWORK

ꔂ Move

• Network Setting

: Wired

• Network Setting

: Wired

• Network Status

: Internet is connected

• Network Status

: Internet is connected

• Legal Notice
• ESN

ꔠ
ꔉ

• Legal Notice
• ESN

ꔉ Enter

LGE-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ꔠ
ꔉ

NETCAST

1
2
3

Select NETWORK.

ENTER

Select ESN.

ENTER

See the ESN serial number.

Netflix Deactivation
Once deactivated, TV will no longer instantly stream from your Netflix Instant Queue.
If you deactivate, the TV cannot instantly stream from your Netflix Instant Queue.

If you want, you can activate Netflix later.
Setup

Setup

Weather Effect

Restore Yahoo! Factory Settings

Service Maintenance

Netflix Deactivation

? Do you want to deactivate this device?
Once deactivated, this device will no longer instantly
stream from your Netflix instant Queue.

Vudu Deactivation
Close

RED

Select Setup option.

ENTER

Select Service Maintenance.

4
5

ENTER

Select Netflix Deactivation.

ENTER

Select OK to deactivate the TV.
This TV is not currently activated to instantly stream from
your Netflix instant Queue.

NETCAST

Display NetCast menu.

Cancel

NETCAST
Activating the TV
In order to make rental/purchase transactions on the Vudu service, a user must create an account on
vudu.com. That account is linked to a specific device, via a process called “activation”. It is possible
to have multiple devices associated with a single Vudu account.
If newer software is needed, a software update screen will automatically appear.
Note that this service is provided by the Content Provider, Vudu. It is dependent on Vudu to provide the
data.

1
2

Select VUDU.

You will receive an e-mail with a link.
Click the e-mail link.

Select FREE HD Rental.

Create your VUDU account to activate your
TV if you no have account.
If you have an existing account, log into your
account.

ENTER

Enter your e-mail address.

Enter your Sign in Email address and Password
to log into your account.

Your VUDU account has been activated.

NETCAST

ENTER

VUDU Deactivation
Once deactivated, this TV will no longer instantly stream from Vudu.

If you want, you can activate VUDU later.
Setup

Setup

Weather Effect

Restore Yahoo! Factory Settings

Service Maintenance

Netflix Deactivation

? Do you want to deactivate this device?
Deactivated VUDU will remove this device from
your VUDU account.

Vudu Deactivation
Close
OK

3
4
5

Cancel

Display NetCast menu.

RED

Select Setup option.

ENTER

Select Service Maintenance.

ENTER

Select Vudu Deactivation.

ENTER

Select OK to deactivate the TV.

NETCAST

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2010:04:22 19:25:11+09:00
Creator                         : Adobe Illustrator CS3
Modify Date                     : 2010:08:13 16:47:11-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : SAC34134205_1
Creator Tool                    : Adobe Illustrator CS3
Metadata Date                   : 2010:08:13 16:47:11-05:00
Thumbnail Width                 : 256
Thumbnail Height                : 188
Thumbnail Format                : JPEG
Thumbnail Image                 : (Binary data 15373 bytes, use -b option to extract)
Document ID                     : uuid:48067996F44DDF11B3E482A9A52C097C
Instance ID                     : uuid:744a48f5-6b14-40b6-a010-815665e25e7a
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:47067996F44DDF11B3E482A9A52C097C
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:E6EF6DDDEDCCDE1183F9D745B442B764
N Pages                         : 1
Has Visible Transparency        : False
Has Visible Overprint           : True
Max Page Size W                 : 419.999945
Max Page Size H                 : 297.000002
Max Page Size Unit              : Millimeters
Plate Names                     : Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black
Swatch Group Name               : Default Swatch Group
Swatch Group Type               : 0
Swatch Colorant Swatch Name     : C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, C=0 M=0 Y=0 K=0, C=0 M=0 Y=0 K=100, C=0 M=45 Y=60 K=0, C=0 M=50 Y=5 K=0, C=0 M=90 Y=100 K=0, C=100 M=20 Y=100 K=0, C=100 M=40 Y=15 K=0, C=20 M=0 Y=100 K=0, C=25 M=100 Y=25 K=0, C=40 M=40 Y=40 K=0, C=40 M=70 Y=100 K=0, C=75 M=90 Y=0 K=0, Aqua, Blue, Blue Gray, Blue Sky, Brown, Dark Blue, Forest Green, Gold, Grass Green, Orange, Red, Violet, K=100, K=0, K=100, K=25, K=50, K=75, K=100, C=25 M=0 Y=0 K=0, C=50 M=0 Y=0 K=0, C=75 M=0 Y=0 K=0, C=100 M=0 Y=0 K=0, C=25 M=25 Y=0 K=0, C=50 M=50 Y=0 K=0, C=75 M=75 Y=0 K=0, C=100 M=100 Y=0 K=0, C=0 M=25 Y=0 K=0, C=0 M=50 Y=0 K=0, C=0 M=75 Y=0 K=0, C=0 M=100 Y=0 K=0, C=0 M=25 Y=25 K=0, C=0 M=50 Y=50 K=0, C=0 M=75 Y=75 K=0, C=0 M=100 Y=100 K=0, C=0 M=0 Y=25 K=0, C=0 M=0 Y=50 K=0, C=0 M=0 Y=75 K=0, C=0 M=0 Y=100 K=0, C=25 M=0 Y=25 K=0, C=50 M=0 Y=50 K=0, C=75 M=0 Y=75 K=0, C=100 M=0 Y=100 K=0, C=25 M=13 Y=0 K=0, C=50 M=25 Y=0 K=0, C=75 M=38 Y=0 K=0, C=100 M=50 Y=0 K=0, C=13 M=25 Y=0 K=0, C=25 M=50 Y=0 K=0, C=38 M=75 Y=0 K=0, C=50 M=100 Y=0 K=0, C=0 M=25 Y=13 K=0, C=0 M=50 Y=25 K=0, C=0 M=75 Y=38 K=0, C=0 M=100 Y=50 K=0, C=0 M=13 Y=25 K=0, C=0 M=25 Y=50 K=0, C=0 M=38 Y=75 K=0, C=0 M=50 Y=100 K=0, C=13 M=0 Y=25 K=0, C=25 M=0 Y=50 K=0, C=38 M=0 Y=75 K=0, C=50 M=0 Y=100 K=0, C=25 M=0 Y=13 K=0, C=50 M=0 Y=25 K=0, C=75 M=0 Y=38 K=0, C=100 M=0 Y=50 K=0, C=25 M=13 Y=13 K=0, C=50 M=25 Y=25 K=0, C=75 M=38 Y=38 K=0, C=100 M=50 Y=50 K=0, C=25 M=25 Y=13 K=0, C=50 M=50 Y=25 K=0, C=75 M=75 Y=38 K=0, C=100 M=100 Y=50 K=0, C=13 M=25 Y=13 K=0, C=25 M=50 Y=25 K=0, C=38 M=75 Y=38 K=0, C=50 M=100 Y=50 K=0, C=13 M=25 Y=25 K=0, C=25 M=50 Y=50 K=0, C=38 M=75 Y=75 K=0, C=50 M=100 Y=100 K=0, C=13 M=13 Y=25 K=0, C=25 M=25 Y=50 K=0, C=38 M=38 Y=75 K=0, C=50 M=50 Y=100 K=0, C=25 M=13 Y=25 K=0, C=50 M=25 Y=50 K=0, C=75 M=38 Y=75 K=0, C=100 M=50 Y=100 K=0, PANTONE 275 CVC, PANTONE 207 CVU, PANTONE 286 CVU, PANTONE Reflex Blue CVC, C=100 M=100 Y=100 K=100, PANTONE 258 CVC, PANTONE 207 C
Swatch Colorant Mode            : CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, Unknown (GRAY), Unknown (GRAY), Unknown (GRAY), Unknown (GRAY), Unknown (GRAY), Unknown (GRAY), Unknown (GRAY), CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK, CMYK
Swatch Colorant Type            : PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, PROCESS, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, SPOT, PROCESS, SPOT, SPOT
Swatch Colorant Cyan            : 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.179999, 2.749997, 2.350003, 94.900006, 93.729997, 19.999999, 19.610000, 32.550001, 28.630000, 74.900001, 94.509995, 94.509995, 44.709998, 81.569999, 33.329999, 95.690000, 94.900006, 5.100000, 75.689995, 1.960000, 12.940000, 45.100003, 24.710000, 50.200003, 78.039998, 91.369998, 24.710000, 50.200003, 74.900001, 97.649997, 3.140002, 2.749997, 2.749997, 0.779998, 1.959997, 2.350003, 1.959997, 1.179999, 3.920001, 2.350003, 2.749997, 3.140002, 25.100005, 50.589997, 75.290000, 92.549998, 24.710000, 50.200003, 75.290000, 94.509995, 12.159997, 25.100005, 37.250000, 50.200003, 2.350003, 3.140002, 0.779998, 1.569998, 2.749997, 3.140002, 2.749997, 2.350003, 12.940001, 25.100005, 38.040000, 50.200003, 25.100005, 50.200003, 76.470000, 93.729997, 23.920000, 47.839999, 71.759999, 94.119996, 23.530000, 46.270001, 70.200002, 96.079999, 11.369997, 20.389998, 27.450001, 32.159996, 11.369997, 19.999999, 26.670003, 33.329999, 11.759996, 21.179998, 27.840000, 35.689998, 23.920000, 46.270001, 70.200002, 93.329996, 98.429996, 15.689999, 94.509995, 94.900006, 0.000000, 42.749998, 0.000000
Swatch Colorant Magenta         : 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 44.709998, 49.800003, 90.979999, 18.820000, 39.999998, 1.569998, 94.119996, 34.899998, 66.270000, 90.200007, 5.100000, 50.980002, 35.290000, 6.270000, 82.349998, 90.979999, 36.859998, 19.610000, 6.270000, 44.709998, 92.549998, 90.979999, 2.749997, 2.350003, 3.140002, 5.879998, 24.710000, 49.800003, 74.900001, 98.819995, 24.309999, 49.800003, 74.900001, 98.819995, 24.309999, 49.800003, 74.900001, 96.079999, 1.179999, 1.179999, 1.569998, 1.959997, 1.569998, 1.959997, 1.959997, 7.449996, 12.159997, 24.710000, 37.650001, 50.980002, 24.710000, 50.200003, 74.509996, 96.859998, 24.309999, 49.409997, 74.900001, 96.469998, 11.759996, 24.309999, 37.250000, 49.800003, 1.959997, 2.749997, 1.569998, 2.350003, 1.959997, 2.749997, 3.530002, 5.489999, 11.759996, 22.350001, 30.980003, 38.040000, 23.920000, 47.450000, 71.759999, 98.429996, 24.309999, 48.240000, 72.549999, 92.939997, 24.309999, 47.839999, 72.549999, 93.729997, 12.159997, 22.350001, 31.369996, 40.779996, 11.369997, 21.570003, 29.799998, 35.290003, 94.900006, 94.119996, 62.750000, 73.329997, 0.000000, 76.080000, 100.000000
Swatch Colorant Yellow          : 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 60.000002, 7.059997, 91.759998, 94.900006, 13.330001, 97.649997, 23.920000, 34.509999, 93.729997, 2.749997, 53.329998, 2.750000, 23.920000, 5.100000, 95.690000, 8.240000, 95.289999, 92.939997, 98.039997, 93.329996, 96.469998, 1.960000, 4.310000, 1.179999, 5.489999, 4.310000, 2.350003, 2.350003, 1.959997, 1.959997, 3.530002, 4.310000, 4.710001, 3.140002, 25.100005, 50.200003, 75.689995, 91.369998, 24.710000, 49.800003, 75.290000, 91.369998, 25.100005, 49.800003, 75.290000, 93.729997, 3.920001, 4.310000, 3.140002, 2.749997, 4.310000, 2.749997, 3.140002, 2.749997, 12.549996, 24.710000, 37.650001, 51.370001, 25.100005, 50.200003, 75.290000, 92.549998, 25.100005, 50.200003, 75.290000, 98.039997, 12.549996, 25.100005, 38.040000, 48.240000, 12.159997, 21.959996, 30.980003, 34.509999, 11.759996, 20.780003, 27.840000, 33.329999, 11.759996, 21.959996, 29.799998, 37.250000, 24.309999, 47.060001, 70.589995, 95.289999, 24.309999, 47.839999, 70.980000, 94.119996, 23.920000, 47.060001, 70.589995, 94.119996, 27.840000, 53.729999, 6.270000, 7.449999, 0.000000, 2.350000, 42.999998
Swatch Colorant Black           : 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 0.000000, 100.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 5.489999, 3.140002, 0.000000, 6.269997, 10.979998, 16.079998, 0.389999, 0.780000, 0.390000, 9.410000, 0.390000, 25.490001, 1.960000, 32.159999, 0.390000, 0.390000, 0.000000, 2.350000, 0.390000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.000000, 0.389999, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.179999, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.000000, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.000000, 0.389999, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.389999, 0.000000, 0.389999, 0.389999, 0.779998, 1.179999, 4.710001, 11.759996, 24.309999, 1.959997, 7.059997, 14.899999, 25.880003, 1.179999, 5.879998, 13.330001, 25.100005, 1.569998, 6.669998, 14.510000, 25.489998, 1.179999, 5.489999, 13.730001, 22.749996, 1.569998, 6.669998, 14.510000, 27.450001, 14.900000, 4.310000, 0.780000, 1.570000, 100.000000, 0.390000, 19.000000
Swatch Colorant Tint            : 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000, 100.000000
Swatch Colorant Gray            : 255, 0, 255, 63, 127, 191, 255
Producer                        : Adobe PDF library 8.00
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 218

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

LG 55LX9500 SAC34134205_1 User Manual Owner's Sac34134205 2 Eng

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation